PR 17287, DT_NEEDED of unneeded libraries affects --as-needed
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
710
711 @ifset UsesEnvVars
712 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
713 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
714 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
715 @end ifset
716
717 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
718 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
719 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
720
721 @cindex emulation
722 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
723 @item -m @var{emulation}
724 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
725 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
726
727 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
728 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
729
730 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
731 configured.
732
733 @cindex link map
734 @kindex -M
735 @kindex --print-map
736 @item -M
737 @itemx --print-map
738 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
739 information about the link, including the following:
740
741 @itemize @bullet
742 @item
743 Where object files are mapped into memory.
744 @item
745 How common symbols are allocated.
746 @item
747 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
748 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
749 @item
750 The values assigned to symbols.
751
752 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
753 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
754 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
755 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
756 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
757 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
758 linker script containing:
759
760 @smallexample
761 foo = 1
762 foo = foo * 4
763 foo = foo + 8
764 @end smallexample
765
766 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
767 option is used:
768
769 @smallexample
770 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
773 @end smallexample
774
775 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
776 scripts.
777 @end itemize
778
779 @kindex -n
780 @cindex read-only text
781 @cindex NMAGIC
782 @kindex --nmagic
783 @item -n
784 @itemx --nmagic
785 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
786 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
787 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
788
789 @kindex -N
790 @kindex --omagic
791 @cindex read/write from cmd line
792 @cindex OMAGIC
793 @item -N
794 @itemx --omagic
795 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
796 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
797 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
798 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
799 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
800 specification published by Microsoft.
801
802 @kindex --no-omagic
803 @cindex OMAGIC
804 @item --no-omagic
805 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
806 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
807 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
808 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
809
810 @kindex -o @var{output}
811 @kindex --output=@var{output}
812 @cindex naming the output file
813 @item -o @var{output}
814 @itemx --output=@var{output}
815 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
816 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
817 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
818
819 @kindex -O @var{level}
820 @cindex generating optimized output
821 @item -O @var{level}
822 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
823 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
824 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
825 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
826 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
827 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
828 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
829
830 @kindex --push-state
831 @cindex push state governing input file handling
832 @item --push-state
833 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
834 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
835 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
836
837 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
838 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
839 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
840 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
841 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
842 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
843
844 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
845 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
846 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
847 something as follows:
848
849 @smallexample
850 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
851 @end smallexample
852
853 @kindex --pop-state
854 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
855 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
856 flags governing input file handling.
857
858 @kindex -q
859 @kindex --emit-relocs
860 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
861 @item -q
862 @itemx --emit-relocs
863 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
864 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
865 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
866 in larger executables.
867
868 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
869
870 @kindex --force-dynamic
871 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
872 @item --force-dynamic
873 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
874 to VxWorks targets.
875
876 @cindex partial link
877 @cindex relocatable output
878 @kindex -r
879 @kindex --relocatable
880 @item -r
881 @itemx --relocatable
882 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
883 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
884 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
885 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
886 @code{OMAGIC}.
887 @c ; see @option{-N}.
888 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
889 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
890 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
891
892 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
893 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
894 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
895 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
896 with input files in other formats at all.
897
898 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
899
900 @kindex -R @var{file}
901 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
902 @cindex symbol-only input
903 @item -R @var{filename}
904 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
905 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
906 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
907 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
908 programs. You may use this option more than once.
909
910 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
911 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
912 the @option{-rpath} option.
913
914 @kindex -s
915 @kindex --strip-all
916 @cindex strip all symbols
917 @item -s
918 @itemx --strip-all
919 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
920
921 @kindex -S
922 @kindex --strip-debug
923 @cindex strip debugger symbols
924 @item -S
925 @itemx --strip-debug
926 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
927
928 @kindex -t
929 @kindex --trace
930 @cindex input files, displaying
931 @item -t
932 @itemx --trace
933 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
934
935 @kindex -T @var{script}
936 @kindex --script=@var{script}
937 @cindex script files
938 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
939 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
940 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
941 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
942 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
943 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
944 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
945 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
946 options accumulate.
947
948 @kindex -dT @var{script}
949 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
950 @cindex script files
951 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
952 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
953 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
954
955 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
956 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
957 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
958 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
959 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
960 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
961 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
962 @samp{gcc}).
963
964 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
965 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
966 @cindex undefined symbol
967 @item -u @var{symbol}
968 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
969 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
970 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
971 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
972 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
973 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
974
975 @kindex -Ur
976 @cindex constructors
977 @item -Ur
978 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
979 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
980 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
981 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
982 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
983 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
984 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
985 @samp{-r} for the others.
986
987 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
988 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
990 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
991 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
992 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
993 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
994 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
995 in a linker script.
996
997 @kindex -v
998 @kindex -V
999 @kindex --version
1000 @cindex version
1001 @item -v
1002 @itemx --version
1003 @itemx -V
1004 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1005 lists the supported emulations.
1006
1007 @kindex -x
1008 @kindex --discard-all
1009 @cindex deleting local symbols
1010 @item -x
1011 @itemx --discard-all
1012 Delete all local symbols.
1013
1014 @kindex -X
1015 @kindex --discard-locals
1016 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1017 @item -X
1018 @itemx --discard-locals
1019 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1020 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1021 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1022
1023 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1024 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1025 @cindex symbol tracing
1026 @item -y @var{symbol}
1027 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1028 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1029 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1030 to prepend an underscore.
1031
1032 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1033 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1034
1035 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1036 @item -Y @var{path}
1037 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1038 for Solaris compatibility.
1039
1040 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1041 @item -z @var{keyword}
1042 The recognized keywords are:
1043 @table @samp
1044
1045 @item combreloc
1046 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1047 lookup caching possible.
1048
1049 @item defs
1050 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1051 shared libraries are still allowed.
1052
1053 @item execstack
1054 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1055
1056 @item global
1057 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1058 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1059 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1060
1061 @item initfirst
1062 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1063 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1064 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1065 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1066 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1067 objects.
1068
1069 @item interpose
1070 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1071 but the primary executable.
1072
1073 @item lazy
1074 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1075 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1076 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1077 Lazy binding is the default.
1078
1079 @item loadfltr
1080 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1081 runtime.
1082
1083 @item muldefs
1084 Allows multiple definitions.
1085
1086 @item nocombreloc
1087 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1088
1089 @item nocopyreloc
1090 Disables production of copy relocs.
1091
1092 @item nodefaultlib
1093 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1094 ignore any default library search paths.
1095
1096 @item nodelete
1097 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1098
1099 @item nodlopen
1100 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1101
1102 @item nodump
1103 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1104
1105 @item noexecstack
1106 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1107
1108 @item norelro
1109 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1110
1111 @item now
1112 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1113 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1114 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1115 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1116 first called.
1117
1118 @item origin
1119 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1120
1121 @item relro
1122 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1123
1124 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1125 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1126
1127 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1128 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1129
1130 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1131 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1132 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1133 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1134
1135 @end table
1136
1137 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1138
1139 @kindex -(
1140 @cindex groups of archives
1141 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1142 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1143 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1144 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1145
1146 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1147 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1148 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1149 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1150 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1151 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1152 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1153 resolved.
1154
1155 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1156 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1157 more archives.
1158
1159 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1160 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1161 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1162 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1163 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1164 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1165 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1166 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1167 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1168 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1169 restore the old behaviour.
1170
1171 @kindex --as-needed
1172 @kindex --no-as-needed
1173 @item --as-needed
1174 @itemx --no-as-needed
1175 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1176 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1177 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1178 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1179 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1180 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1181 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1182 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1183 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1184 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1185 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1186 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1187 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1188
1189 @kindex --add-needed
1190 @kindex --no-add-needed
1191 @item --add-needed
1192 @itemx --no-add-needed
1193 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1194 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1195 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1196 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1197
1198 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1199 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1200 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1201
1202 @kindex -Bdynamic
1203 @kindex -dy
1204 @kindex -call_shared
1205 @item -Bdynamic
1206 @itemx -dy
1207 @itemx -call_shared
1208 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1209 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1210 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1211 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1212 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1213 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1214
1215 @kindex -Bgroup
1216 @item -Bgroup
1217 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1218 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1219 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1220 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1221 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1222
1223 @kindex -Bstatic
1224 @kindex -dn
1225 @kindex -non_shared
1226 @kindex -static
1227 @item -Bstatic
1228 @itemx -dn
1229 @itemx -non_shared
1230 @itemx -static
1231 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1232 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1233 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1234 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1235 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1236 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1237 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1238 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1239 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1240 libraries.
1241
1242 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1243 @item -Bsymbolic
1244 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1245 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1246 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1247 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1248 platforms which support shared libraries.
1249
1250 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1251 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1252 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1253 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1254 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1255 libraries.
1256
1257 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1258 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1259 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1260 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1261 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1262 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1263 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1264 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1265 which support shared libraries.
1266
1267 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1268 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1269
1270 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1271 @item --dynamic-list-data
1272 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1273
1274 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1275 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1276 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1277 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1278
1279 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1280 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1281 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1282
1283 @kindex --check-sections
1284 @kindex --no-check-sections
1285 @item --check-sections
1286 @itemx --no-check-sections
1287 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1288 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1289 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1290 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1291 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1292 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1293 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1294 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1295 option.
1296
1297 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1298 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1299 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1300 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1301 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1302 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1303 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1304 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1305 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1306 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1307 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1308 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1309
1310 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1311 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1312 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1313 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1314 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1315 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1316 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1317 symbols.
1318
1319 @cindex cross reference table
1320 @kindex --cref
1321 @item --cref
1322 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1323 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1324 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1325
1326 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1327 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1328 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1329 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1330 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1331 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1332 symbol are listed.
1333
1334 @cindex common allocation
1335 @kindex --no-define-common
1336 @item --no-define-common
1337 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1338 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1339 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1340
1341 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1342 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1343 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1344 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1345 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1346 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1347 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1348 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1349 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1350 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1351
1352 @cindex symbols, from command line
1353 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1354 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1355 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1356 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1357 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1358 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1359 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1360 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1361 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1362 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1363 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1364 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1365 @var{expression}.
1366
1367 @cindex demangling, from command line
1368 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1369 @kindex --no-demangle
1370 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1371 @itemx --no-demangle
1372 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1373 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1374 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1375 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1376 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1377 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1378 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1379 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1380 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1381
1382 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1383 @kindex -I@var{file}
1384 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1385 @item -I@var{file}
1386 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1387 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1388 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1389 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1390 doing.
1391
1392 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1393 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1394 @item --fatal-warnings
1395 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1396 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1397 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1398
1399 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1400 @item --force-exe-suffix
1401 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1402
1403 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1404 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1405 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1406 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1407 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1408 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1409
1410 @kindex --gc-sections
1411 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1412 @cindex garbage collection
1413 @item --gc-sections
1414 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1415 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1416 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1417 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1418 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1419
1420 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1421 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1422 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1423 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1424 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1425 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1426 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1427 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1428 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1429
1430 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1431 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1432 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1433 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1434
1435 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1436 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1437 @cindex garbage collection
1438 @item --print-gc-sections
1439 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1440 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1441 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1442 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1443 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1444 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1445 line.
1446
1447 @kindex --print-output-format
1448 @cindex output format
1449 @item --print-output-format
1450 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1451 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1452 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1453
1454 @cindex help
1455 @cindex usage
1456 @kindex --help
1457 @item --help
1458 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1459
1460 @kindex --target-help
1461 @item --target-help
1462 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1463
1464 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1465 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1466 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1467 @option{-M} option, above.
1468
1469 @cindex memory usage
1470 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1471 @item --no-keep-memory
1472 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1473 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1474 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1475 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1476 while linking a large executable.
1477
1478 @kindex --no-undefined
1479 @kindex -z defs
1480 @item --no-undefined
1481 @itemx -z defs
1482 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1483 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1484 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1485 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1486 libraries being linked in.
1487
1488 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1489 @kindex -z muldefs
1490 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1491 @itemx -z muldefs
1492 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1493 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1494 first definition will be used.
1495
1496 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1497 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1498 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1499 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1500 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1501 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1502 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1503 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1504 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1505
1506 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1507 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1508 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1509 a shared library.
1510
1511 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1512 libraries specified at link time are that:
1513
1514 @itemize @bullet
1515 @item
1516 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1517 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1518 resolvable at load time.
1519 @item
1520 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1521 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1522
1523 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1524 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1525 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1526 appropriate memset function.
1527 @end itemize
1528
1529 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1530 @item --no-undefined-version
1531 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1532 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1533 will be issued instead.
1534
1535 @kindex --default-symver
1536 @item --default-symver
1537 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1538 exported symbols.
1539
1540 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1541 @item --default-imported-symver
1542 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1543 imported symbols.
1544
1545 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1546 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1547 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1548 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1549 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1550 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1551 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1552 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1553 inappropriate.
1554
1555 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1556 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1557 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1558 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1559
1560 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1561 @item --no-whole-archive
1562 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1563 archive files.
1564
1565 @cindex output file after errors
1566 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1567 @item --noinhibit-exec
1568 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1569 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1570 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1571 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1572
1573 @kindex -nostdlib
1574 @item -nostdlib
1575 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1576 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1577 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1578
1579 @ifclear SingleFormat
1580 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1581 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1582 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1583 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1584 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1585 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1586 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1587 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1588 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1589 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1590 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1591 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1592 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1593 @end ifclear
1594
1595 @kindex -pie
1596 @kindex --pic-executable
1597 @item -pie
1598 @itemx --pic-executable
1599 @cindex position independent executables
1600 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1601 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1602 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1603 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1604 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1605 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1606
1607 @kindex -qmagic
1608 @item -qmagic
1609 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1610
1611 @kindex -Qy
1612 @item -Qy
1613 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1614
1615 @kindex --relax
1616 @cindex synthesizing linker
1617 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1618 @cindex --no-relax
1619 @item --relax
1620 @itemx --no-relax
1621 An option with machine dependent effects.
1622 @ifset GENERIC
1623 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1624 @end ifset
1625 @ifset H8300
1626 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1627 @end ifset
1628 @ifset I960
1629 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1630 @end ifset
1631 @ifset XTENSA
1632 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1633 @end ifset
1634 @ifset M68HC11
1635 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1636 @end ifset
1637 @ifset NIOSII
1638 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1639 @end ifset
1640 @ifset POWERPC
1641 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1642 @end ifset
1643
1644 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1645 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1646 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1647 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1648 instructions, and combining constant values.
1649
1650 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1651 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1652 @ifset GENERIC
1653 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1654 family of processors.
1655 @end ifset
1656
1657 @ifset GENERIC
1658 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1659 but ignored.
1660 @end ifset
1661
1662 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1663 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1664
1665 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1666 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1667 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1668 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1669 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1670 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1671 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1672 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1673 @ifset GENERIC
1674 (such as VxWorks)
1675 @end ifset
1676 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1677 run-time memory.
1678
1679 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1680 or symbols needed for relocations.
1681
1682 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1683 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1684
1685 @ifset GENERIC
1686 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1687 @cindex runtime library search path
1688 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1689 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1690 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1691 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1692 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1693 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1694 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1695 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1696 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1697 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1698
1699 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1700 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1701 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1702 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1703 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1704 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1705 file systems.
1706
1707 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1708 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1709 the @option{-rpath} option.
1710 @end ifset
1711
1712 @ifset GENERIC
1713 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1714 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1715 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1716 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1717 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1718 of the input files.
1719
1720 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1721 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1722 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1723 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1724 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1725 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1726 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1727 appearing multiple times.
1728
1729 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1730 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1731 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1732 runtime linker would do.
1733
1734 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1735 libraries:
1736 @enumerate
1737 @item
1738 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1739 @item
1740 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1741 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1742 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1743 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1744 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1745 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1746 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1747 @item
1748 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1749 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1750 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1751 @item
1752 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1753 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1754 @item
1755 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1756 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1757 @item
1758 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1759 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1760 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1761 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1762 @item
1763 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1764 @item
1765 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1766 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1767 @end enumerate
1768
1769 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1770 warning and continue with the link.
1771 @end ifset
1772
1773 @kindex -shared
1774 @kindex -Bshareable
1775 @item -shared
1776 @itemx -Bshareable
1777 @cindex shared libraries
1778 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1779 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1780 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1781 undefined symbols in the link.
1782
1783 @kindex --sort-common
1784 @item --sort-common
1785 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1786 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1787 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1788 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1789 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1790 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1791 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1792 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1793
1794 @kindex --sort-section=name
1795 @item --sort-section=name
1796 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1797 patterns in the linker script.
1798
1799 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1800 @item --sort-section=alignment
1801 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1802 patterns in the linker script.
1803
1804 @kindex --split-by-file
1805 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1806 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1807 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1808 size of 1 if not given.
1809
1810 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1811 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1812 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1813 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1814 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1815 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1816 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1817 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1818 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1819 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1820 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1821 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1822
1823 @kindex --stats
1824 @item --stats
1825 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1826 as execution time and memory usage.
1827
1828 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1829 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1830 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1831 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1832 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1833
1834 @kindex --traditional-format
1835 @cindex traditional format
1836 @item --traditional-format
1837 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1838 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1839 use the traditional format instead.
1840
1841 @cindex dbx
1842 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1843 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1844 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1845 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1846 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1847 combine duplicate entries.
1848
1849 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1850 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1851 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1852 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1853 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1854 line.
1855 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1856 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1857 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1858 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1859 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1860
1861 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1862 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1863 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1864 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1865 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1866 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1867 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1868 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1869 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1870
1871 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1872 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1873 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1874 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1875 byte of the text segment.
1876
1877 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1878 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1879 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1880 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1881 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1882 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1883
1884 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1885 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1886 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1887 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1888 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1889
1890 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1891 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1892 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1893 values for @samp{method}:
1894
1895 @table @samp
1896 @item ignore-all
1897 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1898
1899 @item report-all
1900 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1901
1902 @item ignore-in-object-files
1903 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1904 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1905
1906 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1907 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1908 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1909 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1910 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1911 command line.
1912 @end table
1913
1914 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1915 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1916
1917 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1918 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1919 can change this to a warning.
1920
1921 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1922 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1923 @item --dll-verbose
1924 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1925 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1926 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1927 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1928 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1929
1930 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1931 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1932 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1933 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1934 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1935 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1936 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1937 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1938 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1939 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1940 @xref{WIN32}.
1941
1942 @kindex --warn-common
1943 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1944 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1945 @item --warn-common
1946 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1947 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
1948 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1949 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1950 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
1951 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1952
1953 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1954
1955 @table @samp
1956 @item int i = 1;
1957 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1958 file.
1959
1960 @item extern int i;
1961 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1962 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1963 variable somewhere.
1964
1965 @item int i;
1966 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1967 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1968 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1969 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1970 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1971 a definition of the same variable.
1972 @end table
1973
1974 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1975 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1976 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1977 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1978 a common symbol.
1979
1980 @enumerate
1981 @item
1982 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1983 definition for the symbol.
1984 @smallexample
1985 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1986 overridden by definition
1987 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1988 @end smallexample
1989
1990 @item
1991 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1992 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1993 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1994 @smallexample
1995 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1996 overriding common
1997 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1998 @end smallexample
1999
2000 @item
2001 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2002 @smallexample
2003 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2004 of `@var{symbol}'
2005 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2006 @end smallexample
2007
2008 @item
2009 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2010 @smallexample
2011 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2012 overridden by larger common
2013 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2014 @end smallexample
2015
2016 @item
2017 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2018 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2019 encountered in a different order.
2020 @smallexample
2021 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2022 overriding smaller common
2023 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2024 @end smallexample
2025 @end enumerate
2026
2027 @kindex --warn-constructors
2028 @item --warn-constructors
2029 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2030 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2031 detect the use of global constructors.
2032
2033 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2034 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2035 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2036 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2037 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2038 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2039 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2040 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2041 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2042 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2043 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2044 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2045 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2046
2047 @kindex --warn-once
2048 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2049 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2050 @item --warn-once
2051 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2052 which refers to it.
2053
2054 @kindex --warn-section-align
2055 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2056 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2057 @item --warn-section-align
2058 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2059 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2060 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2061 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2062 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2063
2064 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2065 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2066 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2067
2068 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2069 @item --warn-alternate-em
2070 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2071
2072 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2073 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2074 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2075 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2076 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2077
2078 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2079 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2080 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2081 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2082
2083 @kindex --whole-archive
2084 @cindex including an entire archive
2085 @item --whole-archive
2086 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2087 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2088 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2089 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2090 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2091 library. This option may be used more than once.
2092
2093 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2094 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2095 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2096 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2097 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2098
2099 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2100 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2101 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2102 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2103 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2104 @var{symbol}.
2105
2106 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2107 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2108 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2109 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2110
2111 Here is a trivial example:
2112
2113 @smallexample
2114 void *
2115 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2116 @{
2117 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2118 return __real_malloc (c);
2119 @}
2120 @end smallexample
2121
2122 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2123 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2124 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2125 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2126
2127 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2128 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2129 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2130 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2131 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2132
2133 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2134 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2135 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2136 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2137
2138 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2139 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2140 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2141 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2142 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2143
2144 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2145 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2146 @item --enable-new-dtags
2147 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2148 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2149 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2150 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2151 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2152 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2153 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2154 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2155
2156 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2157 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2158 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2159 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2160 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2161 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2162 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2163
2164 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2165 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2166 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2167 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2168 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2169 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2170 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2171
2172 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2173 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2174 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2175 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2176 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2177 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2178
2179 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2180 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2181 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2182 has been used.
2183
2184 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2185 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2186
2187 @kindex --build-id
2188 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2189 @item --build-id
2190 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2191 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2192 or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2193 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2194 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2195 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2196 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2197 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2198 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2199 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2200 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2201
2202 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2203 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2204 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2205 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2206 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2207 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2208
2209 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2210 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2211 @end table
2212
2213 @c man end
2214
2215 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2216
2217 @c man begin OPTIONS
2218
2219 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2220 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2221 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2222 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2223 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2224 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2225 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2226 object file).
2227
2228 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2229 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2230 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2231 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2232
2233 @table @gcctabopt
2234
2235 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2236 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2237 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2238 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2239 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2240
2241 @kindex --base-file
2242 @item --base-file @var{file}
2243 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2244 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2245 @file{dlltool}.
2246 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2247
2248 @kindex --dll
2249 @item --dll
2250 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2251 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2252 file.
2253 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2254
2255 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2256 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2257 @item --enable-long-section-names
2258 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2259 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2260 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2261 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2262 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2263 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2264 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2265 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2266 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2267 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2268 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2269 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2270 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2271 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2272 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2273 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2274 image and not stripping symbols.
2275 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2276
2277 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2278 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2279 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2280 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2281 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2282 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2283 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2284 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2285 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2286 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2287 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2288 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2289 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2290 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2291 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2292 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2293 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2294 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2295
2296 @kindex --leading-underscore
2297 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2298 @item --leading-underscore
2299 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2300 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2301 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2302 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2303
2304 @cindex DLLs, creating
2305 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2306 @item --export-all-symbols
2307 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2308 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2309 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2310 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2311 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2312 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2313 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2314 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2315 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2316 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2317 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2318 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2319 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2320 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2321 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2322 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2323 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2324 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2325 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2326 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2327 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2328 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2329 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2330
2331 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2332 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2333 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2334 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2335 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2336
2337 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2338 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2339 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2340 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2341
2342 @kindex --file-alignment
2343 @item --file-alignment
2344 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2345 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2346 512.
2347 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2348
2349 @cindex heap size
2350 @kindex --heap
2351 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2352 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2353 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2354 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2355 committed.
2356 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2357
2358 @cindex image base
2359 @kindex --image-base
2360 @item --image-base @var{value}
2361 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2362 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2363 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2364 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2365 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2366 for dlls.
2367 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2368
2369 @kindex --kill-at
2370 @item --kill-at
2371 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2372 symbols before they are exported.
2373 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2374
2375 @kindex --large-address-aware
2376 @item --large-address-aware
2377 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2378 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2379 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2380 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2381 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2382 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2383
2384 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2385 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2386 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2387 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2388 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2389 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2390 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2391
2392 @kindex --major-image-version
2393 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2394 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2395 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2396
2397 @kindex --major-os-version
2398 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2399 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2400 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2401
2402 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2403 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2404 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2405 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2406
2407 @kindex --minor-image-version
2408 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2409 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2410 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2411
2412 @kindex --minor-os-version
2413 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2414 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2415 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2416
2417 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2418 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2419 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2420 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2421
2422 @cindex DEF files, creating
2423 @cindex DLLs, creating
2424 @kindex --output-def
2425 @item --output-def @var{file}
2426 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2427 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2428 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2429 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2430 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2431 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2432
2433 @cindex DLLs, creating
2434 @kindex --out-implib
2435 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2436 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2437 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2438 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2439 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2440 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2441 creation step.
2442 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2443
2444 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2445 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2446 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2447 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2448 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2449 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2450 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2451 execution are avoided.
2452 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2453
2454 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2455 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2456 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2457 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2458 default.
2459 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2460
2461 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2462 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2463 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2464 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2465 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2466 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2467 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2468 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2469 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2470 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2471
2472 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2473 @item --enable-auto-import
2474 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2475 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2476 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2477 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2478 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2479 specification published by Microsoft.
2480
2481 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2482 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2483 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2484 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2485 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2486
2487 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2488 see this message:
2489
2490 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2491 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2492
2493 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2494 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2495 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2496 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2497 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2498 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2499 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2500 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2501 the warning, and exit.
2502
2503 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2504 data type of the exported variable:
2505
2506 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2507 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2508 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2509
2510 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2511 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2512 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2513 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2514
2515 @example
2516 extern type extern_array[];
2517 extern_array[1] -->
2518 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2519 @end example
2520
2521 or
2522
2523 @example
2524 extern type extern_array[];
2525 extern_array[1] -->
2526 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2527 @end example
2528
2529 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2530 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2531
2532 @example
2533 extern struct s extern_struct;
2534 extern_struct.field -->
2535 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2536 @end example
2537
2538 or
2539
2540 @example
2541 extern long long extern_ll;
2542 extern_ll -->
2543 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2544 @end example
2545
2546 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2547 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2548 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2549 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2550 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2551 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2552 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2553 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2554
2555 Original:
2556 @example
2557 --foo.h
2558 extern int arr[];
2559 --foo.c
2560 #include "foo.h"
2561 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2562 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2563 @}
2564 @end example
2565
2566 Solution 1:
2567 @example
2568 --foo.h
2569 extern int arr[];
2570 --foo.c
2571 #include "foo.h"
2572 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2573 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2574 volatile int *parr = arr;
2575 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2576 @}
2577 @end example
2578
2579 Solution 2:
2580 @example
2581 --foo.h
2582 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2583 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2584 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2585 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2586 #else
2587 #define FOO_IMPORT
2588 #endif
2589 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2590 --foo.c
2591 #include "foo.h"
2592 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2593 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2594 @}
2595 @end example
2596
2597 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2598 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2599 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2600 functions).
2601 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2602
2603 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2604 @item --disable-auto-import
2605 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2606 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2607 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2608
2609 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2610 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2611 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2612 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2613 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2614 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2615 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2616
2617 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2618 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2619 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2620 DLLs.
2621 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2622
2623 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2624 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2625 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2626 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2627
2628 @kindex --section-alignment
2629 @item --section-alignment
2630 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2631 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2632 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2633
2634 @cindex stack size
2635 @kindex --stack
2636 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2637 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2638 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2639 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2640 committed.
2641 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2642
2643 @kindex --subsystem
2644 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2645 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2646 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2647 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2648 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2649 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2650 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2651 @var{which}.
2652 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2653
2654 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2655 of the PE file header:
2656 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2657
2658 @kindex --dynamicbase
2659 @item --dynamicbase
2660 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2661 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2662 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2663
2664 @kindex --forceinteg
2665 @item --forceinteg
2666 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2667
2668 @kindex --nxcompat
2669 @item --nxcompat
2670 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2671 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2672
2673 @kindex --no-isolation
2674 @item --no-isolation
2675 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2676
2677 @kindex --no-seh
2678 @item --no-seh
2679 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2680 this image.
2681
2682 @kindex --no-bind
2683 @item --no-bind
2684 Do not bind this image.
2685
2686 @kindex --wdmdriver
2687 @item --wdmdriver
2688 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2689
2690 @kindex --tsaware
2691 @item --tsaware
2692 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2693
2694 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2695 @item --insert-timestamp
2696 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2697 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2698 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2699 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2700 will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2701 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2702 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2703 that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2704 identically.
2705 @end table
2706
2707 @c man end
2708
2709 @ifset C6X
2710 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2711
2712 @c man begin OPTIONS
2713
2714 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2715 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2716 all executables use an index of 0.
2717
2718 @table @gcctabopt
2719
2720 @kindex --dsbt-size
2721 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2722 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2723 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2724 entries.
2725
2726 @kindex --dsbt-index
2727 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2728 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2729 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2730 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2731 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2732
2733 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2734 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2735 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2736
2737 @end table
2738
2739 @c man end
2740 @end ifset
2741
2742 @ifset M68HC11
2743 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2744
2745 @c man begin OPTIONS
2746
2747 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2748 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2749
2750 @table @gcctabopt
2751
2752 @kindex --no-trampoline
2753 @item --no-trampoline
2754 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2755 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2756 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2757
2758 @kindex --bank-window
2759 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2760 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2761 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2762 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2763 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2764
2765 @end table
2766
2767 @c man end
2768 @end ifset
2769
2770 @ifset M68K
2771 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2772
2773 @c man begin OPTIONS
2774
2775 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2776 when linking for 68K targets.
2777
2778 @table @gcctabopt
2779
2780 @kindex --got
2781 @item --got=@var{type}
2782 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2783 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2784 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2785 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2786
2787 @end table
2788
2789 @c man end
2790 @end ifset
2791
2792 @ifset MIPS
2793 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2794
2795 @c man begin OPTIONS
2796
2797 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2798 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2799
2800 @table @gcctabopt
2801
2802 @kindex --insn32
2803 @item --insn32
2804 @kindex --no-insn32
2805 @itemx --no-insn32
2806 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2807 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2808 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2809 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2810 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2811 possible.
2812
2813 @end table
2814
2815 @c man end
2816 @end ifset
2817
2818 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2819 @node Environment
2820 @section Environment Variables
2821
2822 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2823
2824 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2825 @ifclear SingleFormat
2826 @code{GNUTARGET},
2827 @end ifclear
2828 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2829
2830 @ifclear SingleFormat
2831 @kindex GNUTARGET
2832 @cindex default input format
2833 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2834 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2835 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2836 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2837 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2838 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2839 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2840 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2841 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2842 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2843 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2844 @end ifclear
2845
2846 @kindex LDEMULATION
2847 @cindex default emulation
2848 @cindex emulation, default
2849 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2850 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2851 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2852 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2853 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2854 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2855 linker was configured.
2856
2857 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2858 @cindex demangling, default
2859 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2860 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2861 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2862 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2863 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2864 options.
2865
2866 @c man end
2867 @end ifset
2868
2869 @node Scripts
2870 @chapter Linker Scripts
2871
2872 @cindex scripts
2873 @cindex linker scripts
2874 @cindex command files
2875 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2876 written in the linker command language.
2877
2878 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2879 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2880 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2881 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2882 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2883 described below.
2884
2885 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2886 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2887 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2888 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2889 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2890
2891 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2892 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2893 default linker script.
2894
2895 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2896 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2897 Linker Scripts}.
2898
2899 @menu
2900 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2901 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2902 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2903 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2904 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2905 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2906 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2907 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2908 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2909 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2910 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2911 @end menu
2912
2913 @node Basic Script Concepts
2914 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2915 @cindex linker script concepts
2916 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2917 describe the linker script language.
2918
2919 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2920 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2921 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2922 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2923 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2924 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2925 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2926 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2927
2928 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2929 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2930 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
2931 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2932 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2933 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2934 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2935 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2936 of debugging information.
2937
2938 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2939 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2940 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2941 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2942 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2943 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2944 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2945 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2946 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2947 RAM address would be the VMA.
2948
2949 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2950 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2951
2952 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2953 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2954 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2955 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2956 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2957 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2958 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2959
2960 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2961 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2962 option.
2963
2964 @node Script Format
2965 @section Linker Script Format
2966 @cindex linker script format
2967 Linker scripts are text files.
2968
2969 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2970 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2971 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2972 generally ignored.
2973
2974 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2975 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2976 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2977 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2978 file name.
2979
2980 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2981 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2982 to whitespace.
2983
2984 @node Simple Example
2985 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2986 @cindex linker script example
2987 @cindex example of linker script
2988 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2989
2990 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2991 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2992 memory layout of the output file.
2993
2994 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2995 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2996 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2997 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2998 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2999 your input files.
3000
3001 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3002 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3003 linker script which will do that:
3004 @smallexample
3005 SECTIONS
3006 @{
3007 . = 0x10000;
3008 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3009 . = 0x8000000;
3010 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3011 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3012 @}
3013 @end smallexample
3014
3015 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3016 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3017 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3018
3019 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3020 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3021 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3022 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3023 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3024 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3025 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3026
3027 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3028 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3029 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3030 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3031 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3032 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3033
3034 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3035 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3036 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3037
3038 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3039 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3040 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3041 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3042 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3043 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3044 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3045
3046 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3047 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3048 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3049 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3050 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3051 sections.
3052
3053 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3054
3055 @node Simple Commands
3056 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3057 @cindex linker script simple commands
3058 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3059
3060 @menu
3061 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3062 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3063 @ifclear SingleFormat
3064 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3065 @end ifclear
3066
3067 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3068 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3069 @end menu
3070
3071 @node Entry Point
3072 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3073 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3074 @cindex start of execution
3075 @cindex first instruction
3076 @cindex entry point
3077 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3078 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3079 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3080 @smallexample
3081 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3082 @end smallexample
3083
3084 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3085 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3086 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3087 @itemize @bullet
3088 @item
3089 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3090 @item
3091 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3092 @item
3093 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3094 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3095 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3096 @item
3097 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3098 @item
3099 The address @code{0}.
3100 @end itemize
3101
3102 @node File Commands
3103 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3104 @cindex linker script file commands
3105 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3106
3107 @table @code
3108 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3109 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3110 @cindex including a linker script
3111 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3112 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3113 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3114 10 levels deep.
3115
3116 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3117 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3118
3119 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3120 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3121 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3122 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3123 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3124 @cindex linker script input object files
3125 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3126 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3127
3128 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3129 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3130 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3131
3132 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3133 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3134
3135 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3136 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3137 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3138 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3139 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3140 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3141 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3142
3143 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3144 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3145 @samp{-l}.
3146
3147 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3148 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3149 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3150
3151 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3152 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3153 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3154 @cindex grouping input files
3155 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3156 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3157 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3158 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3159
3160 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3161 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3162 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3163 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3164 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3165 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3166 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3167 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3168 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3169 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3170 setting afterwards.
3171
3172 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3173 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3174 @cindex output file name in linker script
3175 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3176 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3177 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3178 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3179 precedence.
3180
3181 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3182 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3183
3184 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3185 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3186 @cindex library search path in linker script
3187 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3188 @cindex search path in linker script
3189 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3190 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3191 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3192 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3193 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3194 the command line option are searched first.
3195
3196 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3197 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3198 @cindex first input file
3199 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3200 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3201 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3202 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3203 first file.
3204 @end table
3205
3206 @ifclear SingleFormat
3207 @node Format Commands
3208 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3209 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3210
3211 @table @code
3212 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3213 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3214 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3215 @cindex output file format in linker script
3216 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3217 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3218 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3219 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3220 line option takes precedence.
3221
3222 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3223 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3224 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3225 desired endianness.
3226
3227 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3228 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3229 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3230 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3231
3232 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3233 command:
3234 @smallexample
3235 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3236 @end smallexample
3237 This says that the default format for the output file is
3238 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3239 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3240 format.
3241
3242 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3243 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3244 @cindex input file format in linker script
3245 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3246 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3247 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3248 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3249 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3250 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3251 @end table
3252 @end ifclear
3253
3254 @node REGION_ALIAS
3255 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3256 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3257 @cindex region alias
3258 @cindex region names
3259
3260 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3261 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3262
3263 @smallexample
3264 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3265 @end smallexample
3266
3267 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3268 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3269 to memory regions. An example follows.
3270
3271 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3272 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3273 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3274 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3275 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3276 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3277 sections:
3278
3279 @itemize @bullet
3280 @item
3281 @code{.text} program code;
3282 @item
3283 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3284 @item
3285 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3286 @item
3287 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3288 @end itemize
3289
3290 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3291 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3292 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3293 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3294 @code{C}:
3295 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3296 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3297 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3298 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3299 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3300 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3301 @end multitable
3302 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3303 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3304 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3305 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3306
3307 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3308 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3309 memory layout:
3310 @smallexample
3311 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3312
3313 SECTIONS
3314 @{
3315 .text :
3316 @{
3317 *(.text)
3318 @} > REGION_TEXT
3319 .rodata :
3320 @{
3321 *(.rodata)
3322 rodata_end = .;
3323 @} > REGION_RODATA
3324 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3325 @{
3326 data_start = .;
3327 *(.data)
3328 @} > REGION_DATA
3329 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3330 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3331 .bss :
3332 @{
3333 *(.bss)
3334 @} > REGION_BSS
3335 @}
3336 @end smallexample
3337
3338 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3339 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3340 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3341 @table @code
3342 @item A
3343 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3344 @smallexample
3345 MEMORY
3346 @{
3347 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3348 @}
3349
3350 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3351 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3352 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3353 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3354 @end smallexample
3355 @item B
3356 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3357 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3358 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3359 @smallexample
3360 MEMORY
3361 @{
3362 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3363 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3364 @}
3365
3366 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3367 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3368 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3369 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3370 @end smallexample
3371 @item C
3372 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3373 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3374 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3375 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3376 @smallexample
3377 MEMORY
3378 @{
3379 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3380 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3381 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3382 @}
3383
3384 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3385 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3386 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3387 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3388 @end smallexample
3389 @end table
3390
3391 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3392 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3393 necessary:
3394 @smallexample
3395 #include <string.h>
3396
3397 extern char data_start [];
3398 extern char data_size [];
3399 extern char data_load_start [];
3400
3401 void copy_data(void)
3402 @{
3403 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3404 @{
3405 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3406 @}
3407 @}
3408 @end smallexample
3409
3410 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3411 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3412 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3413
3414 @table @code
3415 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3416 @kindex ASSERT
3417 @cindex assertion in linker script
3418 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3419 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3420
3421 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3422 @kindex EXTERN
3423 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3424 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3425 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3426 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3427 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3428 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3429
3430 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3431 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3432 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3433 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3434 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3435 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3436
3437 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3438 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3439 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3440 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3441 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3442 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3443
3444 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3445 @kindex INSERT
3446 @cindex insert user script into default script
3447 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3448 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3449 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3450 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3451 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3452 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3453 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3454 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3455 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3456 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3457 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3458 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3459 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3460
3461 @smallexample
3462 SECTIONS
3463 @{
3464 OVERLAY :
3465 @{
3466 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3467 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3468 @}
3469 @}
3470 INSERT AFTER .text;
3471 @end smallexample
3472
3473 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3474 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3475 @cindex cross references
3476 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3477 references among certain output sections.
3478
3479 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3480 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3481 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3482 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3483 a function defined in the other section.
3484
3485 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3486 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3487 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3488 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3489 names.
3490
3491 @ifclear SingleFormat
3492 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3493 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3494 @cindex machine architecture
3495 @cindex architecture
3496 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3497 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3498 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3499 the @samp{-f} option.
3500 @end ifclear
3501
3502 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3503 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3504 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3505 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3506 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3507 @xref{Expression Section}.
3508 @end table
3509
3510 @node Assignments
3511 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3512 @cindex assignment in scripts
3513 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3514 @cindex variables, defining
3515 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3516 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3517
3518 @menu
3519 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3520 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3521 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3522 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3523 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3524 @end menu
3525
3526 @node Simple Assignments
3527 @subsection Simple Assignments
3528
3529 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3530
3531 @table @code
3532 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3533 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3534 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3535 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3536 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3537 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3538 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3539 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3540 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3541 @end table
3542
3543 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3544 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3545 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3546
3547 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3548 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3549
3550 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3551
3552 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3553
3554 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3555 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3556 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3557
3558 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3559 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3560
3561 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3562 assignments may be used:
3563
3564 @smallexample
3565 floating_point = 0;
3566 SECTIONS
3567 @{
3568 .text :
3569 @{
3570 *(.text)
3571 _etext = .;
3572 @}
3573 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3574 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3575 @}
3576 @end smallexample
3577 @noindent
3578 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3579 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3580 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3581 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3582 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3583
3584 @node HIDDEN
3585 @subsection HIDDEN
3586 @cindex HIDDEN
3587 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3588 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3589
3590 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3591 @code{HIDDEN}:
3592
3593 @smallexample
3594 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3595 SECTIONS
3596 @{
3597 .text :
3598 @{
3599 *(.text)
3600 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3601 @}
3602 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3603 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3604 @}
3605 @end smallexample
3606 @noindent
3607 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3608
3609 @node PROVIDE
3610 @subsection PROVIDE
3611 @cindex PROVIDE
3612 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3613 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3614 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3615 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3616 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3617 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3618 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3619 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3620
3621 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3622 @smallexample
3623 SECTIONS
3624 @{
3625 .text :
3626 @{
3627 *(.text)
3628 _etext = .;
3629 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3630 @}
3631 @}
3632 @end smallexample
3633
3634 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3635 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3636 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3637 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3638 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3639 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3640
3641 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3642 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3643 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3644 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3645 hidden and won't be exported.
3646
3647 @node Source Code Reference
3648 @subsection Source Code Reference
3649
3650 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3651 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3652 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3653 symbol that does not have a value.
3654
3655 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3656 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3657 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3658 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3659 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3660 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3661 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3662 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3663
3664 @smallexample
3665 extern int foo;
3666 @end smallexample
3667
3668 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3669
3670 @smallexample
3671 _foo = 1000;
3672 @end smallexample
3673
3674 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3675 transformation has taken place.
3676
3677 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3678 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3679 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3680 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3681 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3682 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3683 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3684
3685 @smallexample
3686 int foo = 1000;
3687 @end smallexample
3688
3689 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3690 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3691 number 1000 is initially stored.
3692
3693 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3694 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3695 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3696 So:
3697
3698 @smallexample
3699 foo = 1;
3700 @end smallexample
3701
3702 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3703 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3704 address. Whereas:
3705
3706 @smallexample
3707 int * a = & foo;
3708 @end smallexample
3709
3710 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3711 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3712 the variable @samp{a}.
3713
3714 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3715 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3716 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3717
3718 @smallexample
3719 foo = 1000;
3720 @end smallexample
3721
3722 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3723 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3724 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3725 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3726 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3727
3728 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3729 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3730 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3731 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3732 linker script contains these declarations:
3733
3734 @smallexample
3735 @group
3736 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3737 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3738 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3739 @end group
3740 @end smallexample
3741
3742 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3743
3744 @smallexample
3745 @group
3746 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3747
3748 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3749 @end group
3750 @end smallexample
3751
3752 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3753
3754 @node SECTIONS
3755 @section SECTIONS Command
3756 @kindex SECTIONS
3757 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3758 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3759
3760 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3761 @smallexample
3762 SECTIONS
3763 @{
3764 @var{sections-command}
3765 @var{sections-command}
3766 @dots{}
3767 @}
3768 @end smallexample
3769
3770 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3771
3772 @itemize @bullet
3773 @item
3774 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3775 @item
3776 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3777 @item
3778 an output section description
3779 @item
3780 an overlay description
3781 @end itemize
3782
3783 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3784 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3785 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3786 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3787 the layout of the output file.
3788
3789 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3790 below.
3791
3792 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3793 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3794 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3795 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3796 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3797 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3798
3799 @menu
3800 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3801 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3802 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3803 * Input Section:: Input section description
3804 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3805 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3806 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3807 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3808 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3809 @end menu
3810
3811 @node Output Section Description
3812 @subsection Output Section Description
3813 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3814 @smallexample
3815 @group
3816 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3817 [AT(@var{lma})]
3818 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3819 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3820 [@var{constraint}]
3821 @{
3822 @var{output-section-command}
3823 @var{output-section-command}
3824 @dots{}
3825 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
3826 @end group
3827 @end smallexample
3828
3829 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3830
3831 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3832 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3833 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3834 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
3835 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3836
3837 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3838
3839 @itemize @bullet
3840 @item
3841 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3842 @item
3843 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3844 @item
3845 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3846 @item
3847 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3848 @end itemize
3849
3850 @node Output Section Name
3851 @subsection Output Section Name
3852 @cindex name, section
3853 @cindex section name
3854 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3855 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3856 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3857 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3858 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3859 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3860 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3861 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3862 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3863 commas must be quoted.
3864
3865 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3866 Discarding}.
3867
3868 @node Output Section Address
3869 @subsection Output Section Address
3870 @cindex address, section
3871 @cindex section address
3872 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3873 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3874 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3875
3876 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3877 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3878 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3879 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3880 contained within the output section.
3881
3882 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3883
3884 @itemize @bullet
3885 @item
3886 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3887 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3888 in that region.
3889
3890 @item
3891 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3892 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3893 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3894 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3895
3896 @item
3897 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3898 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3899 counter.
3900 @end itemize
3901
3902 @noindent
3903 For example:
3904
3905 @smallexample
3906 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3907 @end smallexample
3908
3909 @noindent
3910 and
3911
3912 @smallexample
3913 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3914 @end smallexample
3915
3916 @noindent
3917 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3918 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3919 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3920 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3921 input sections.
3922
3923 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3924 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3925 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3926 do something like this:
3927 @smallexample
3928 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3929 @end smallexample
3930 @noindent
3931 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3932 aligned upward to the specified value.
3933
3934 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3935 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3936 sections are ignored).
3937
3938 @node Input Section
3939 @subsection Input Section Description
3940 @cindex input sections
3941 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3942 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3943
3944 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3945 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3946 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3947 map the input files into your memory layout.
3948
3949 @menu
3950 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3951 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3952 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3953 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3954 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3955 @end menu
3956
3957 @node Input Section Basics
3958 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3959 @cindex input section basics
3960 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3961 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3962
3963 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3964 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3965
3966 The most common input section description is to include all input
3967 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3968 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3969 @smallexample
3970 *(.text)
3971 @end smallexample
3972 @noindent
3973 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3974 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3975 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3976 example:
3977 @smallexample
3978 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3979 @end smallexample
3980 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3981 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3982
3983 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3984 @smallexample
3985 *(.text .rdata)
3986 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3987 @end smallexample
3988 @noindent
3989 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3990 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3991 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3992 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3993 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3994 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3995
3996 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3997 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3998 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3999 @smallexample
4000 data.o(.data)
4001 @end smallexample
4002
4003 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4004 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4005
4006 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4007
4008 @smallexample
4009 @group
4010 SECTIONS @{
4011 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4012 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4013 @}
4014 @end group
4015 @end smallexample
4016
4017 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4018 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4019 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4020 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4021 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4022
4023 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4024 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4025 with no whitespace around the colon.
4026
4027 @table @samp
4028 @item archive:file
4029 matches file within archive
4030 @item archive:
4031 matches the whole archive
4032 @item :file
4033 matches file but not one in an archive
4034 @end table
4035
4036 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4037 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4038 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4039 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4040 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4041 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4042 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4043 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4044 command.
4045
4046 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4047 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4048 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4049 @smallexample
4050 data.o
4051 @end smallexample
4052
4053 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4054 and does not contain any wild card
4055 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4056 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4057 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4058 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4059 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4060 the archive search path.
4061
4062 @node Input Section Wildcards
4063 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4064 @cindex input section wildcards
4065 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4066 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4067 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4068 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4069 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4070
4071 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4072 pattern for the file name.
4073
4074 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4075
4076 @table @samp
4077 @item *
4078 matches any number of characters
4079 @item ?
4080 matches any single character
4081 @item [@var{chars}]
4082 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4083 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4084 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4085 @item \
4086 quotes the following character
4087 @end table
4088
4089 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4090 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4091 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4092 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4093 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4094 a @samp{/} character.
4095
4096 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4097 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4098 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4099
4100 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4101 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4102 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4103 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4104 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4105 @smallexample
4106 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4107 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4108 @end smallexample
4109
4110 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4111 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4112 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4113 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4114 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4115 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4116 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4117
4118 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4119 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4120 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4121 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4122 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4123 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4124
4125 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4126 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4127 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4128 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4129 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4130
4131 @cindex SORT
4132 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4133
4134 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4135 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4136
4137 @enumerate
4138 @item
4139 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4140 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4141 sections have the same name.
4142 @item
4143 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4144 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4145 sections have the same alignment.
4146 @item
4147 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4148 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4149 @item
4150 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4151 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4152 @item
4153 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4154 @end enumerate
4155
4156 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4157 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4158 takes precedence over the command line option.
4159
4160 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4161 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4162 treated as nested sorting command.
4163
4164 @enumerate
4165 @item
4166 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4167 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4168 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4169 @item
4170 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4171 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4172 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4173 @end enumerate
4174
4175 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4176 command line option will be ignored.
4177
4178 @cindex SORT_NONE
4179 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4180 section sorting option.
4181
4182 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4183 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4184 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4185
4186 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4187 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4188 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4189 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4190 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4191 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4192 @smallexample
4193 @group
4194 SECTIONS @{
4195 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4196 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4197 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4198 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4199 @}
4200 @end group
4201 @end smallexample
4202
4203 @node Input Section Common
4204 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4205 @cindex common symbol placement
4206 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4207 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4208 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4209 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4210 named @samp{COMMON}.
4211
4212 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4213 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4214 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4215 input files are placed in another section.
4216
4217 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4218 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4219 @smallexample
4220 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4221 @end smallexample
4222
4223 @cindex scommon section
4224 @cindex small common symbols
4225 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4226 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4227 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4228 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4229 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4230 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4231 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4232 locations.
4233
4234 @cindex [COMMON]
4235 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4236 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4237 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4238
4239 @node Input Section Keep
4240 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4241 @cindex KEEP
4242 @cindex garbage collection
4243 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4244 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4245 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4246 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4247 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4248
4249 @node Input Section Example
4250 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4251 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4252 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4253 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4254 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4255 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4256 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4257 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4258 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4259 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4260
4261 @smallexample
4262 @group
4263 SECTIONS @{
4264 outputa 0x10000 :
4265 @{
4266 all.o
4267 foo.o (.input1)
4268 @}
4269 @end group
4270 @group
4271 outputb :
4272 @{
4273 foo.o (.input2)
4274 foo1.o (.input1)
4275 @}
4276 @end group
4277 @group
4278 outputc :
4279 @{
4280 *(.input1)
4281 *(.input2)
4282 @}
4283 @}
4284 @end group
4285 @end smallexample
4286
4287 @node Output Section Data
4288 @subsection Output Section Data
4289 @cindex data
4290 @cindex section data
4291 @cindex output section data
4292 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4293 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4294 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4295 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4296 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4297 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4298 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4299 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4300 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4301 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4302 counter.
4303
4304 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4305 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4306 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4307 stored.
4308
4309 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4310 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4311 @smallexample
4312 BYTE(1)
4313 LONG(addr)
4314 @end smallexample
4315
4316 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4317 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4318 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4319 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4320 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4321
4322 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4323 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4324 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4325 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4326 endianness of the first input object file.
4327
4328 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4329 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4330 @smallexample
4331 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4332 @end smallexample
4333 whereas this will work:
4334 @smallexample
4335 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4336 @end smallexample
4337
4338 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4339 @cindex holes, filling
4340 @cindex unspecified memory
4341 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4342 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4343 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4344 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4345 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4346 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4347 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4348 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4349 different parts of an output section.
4350
4351 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4352 value @samp{0x90}:
4353 @smallexample
4354 FILL(0x90909090)
4355 @end smallexample
4356
4357 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4358 section attribute, but it only affects the
4359 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4360 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4361 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4362 expression.
4363
4364 @node Output Section Keywords
4365 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4366 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4367 commands.
4368
4369 @table @code
4370 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4371 @cindex input filename symbols
4372 @cindex filename symbols
4373 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4374 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4375 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4376 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4377 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4378
4379 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4380 normally used for any other object file format.
4381
4382 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4383 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4384 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4385 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4386 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4387 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4388 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4389 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4390 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4391 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4392 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4393 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4394 ignored for other object file formats.
4395
4396 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4397 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4398 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4399 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4400 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4401 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4402 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4403 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4404 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4405 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4406 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4407 @code{exit}.
4408
4409 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4410 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4411 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4412 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4413 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4414 runtime code expects to see.
4415
4416 @smallexample
4417 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4418 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4419 *(.ctors)
4420 LONG(0)
4421 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4422 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4423 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4424 *(.dtors)
4425 LONG(0)
4426 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4427 @end smallexample
4428
4429 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4430 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4431 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4432 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4433 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4434 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4435 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4436 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4437
4438 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4439 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4440 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4441 scripts.
4442
4443 @end table
4444
4445 @node Output Section Discarding
4446 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4447 @cindex discarding sections
4448 @cindex sections, discarding
4449 @cindex removing sections
4450 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4451 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4452 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4453 @smallexample
4454 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4455 @end smallexample
4456 @noindent
4457 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4458 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4459 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4460 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4461 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4462 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4463 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4464 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4465 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4466
4467 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4468 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4469 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4470 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4471 section is discarded.
4472
4473 @cindex /DISCARD/
4474 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4475 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4476 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4477
4478 @node Output Section Attributes
4479 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4480 @cindex output section attributes
4481 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4482 like this:
4483
4484 @smallexample
4485 @group
4486 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4487 [AT(@var{lma})]
4488 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4489 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4490 [@var{constraint}]
4491 @{
4492 @var{output-section-command}
4493 @var{output-section-command}
4494 @dots{}
4495 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4496 @end group
4497 @end smallexample
4498
4499 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4500 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4501 remaining section attributes.
4502
4503 @menu
4504 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4505 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4506 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4507 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4508 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4509 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4510 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4511 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4512 @end menu
4513
4514 @node Output Section Type
4515 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4516 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4517 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4518
4519 @table @code
4520 @item NOLOAD
4521 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4522 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4523 @item DSECT
4524 @itemx COPY
4525 @itemx INFO
4526 @itemx OVERLAY
4527 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4528 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4529 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4530 section when the program is run.
4531 @end table
4532
4533 @kindex NOLOAD
4534 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4535 @cindex loading, preventing
4536 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4537 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4538 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4539 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4540 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4541 @smallexample
4542 @group
4543 SECTIONS @{
4544 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4545 @dots{}
4546 @}
4547 @end group
4548 @end smallexample
4549
4550 @node Output Section LMA
4551 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4552 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4553 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4554 @cindex load address
4555 @cindex section load address
4556 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4557 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4558 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4559 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4560 address is optional.
4561
4562 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4563 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4564 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4565 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4566 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4567
4568 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4569 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4570 load address:
4571
4572 @itemize @bullet
4573 @item
4574 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4575 the LMA address as well.
4576
4577 @item
4578 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4579
4580 @item
4581 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4582 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4583 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4584 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4585 the last section in the located region.
4586
4587 @item
4588 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4589 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4590
4591 @item
4592 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4593 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4594 @end itemize
4595
4596 @cindex ROM initialized data
4597 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4598 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4599 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4600 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4601 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4602 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4603 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4604 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4605 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4606
4607 @smallexample
4608 @group
4609 SECTIONS
4610 @{
4611 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4612 .mdata 0x2000 :
4613 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4614 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4615 .bss 0x3000 :
4616 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4617 @}
4618 @end group
4619 @end smallexample
4620
4621 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4622 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4623 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4624 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4625 script.
4626
4627 @smallexample
4628 @group
4629 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4630 char *src = &_etext;
4631 char *dst = &_data;
4632
4633 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4634 while (dst < &_edata)
4635 *dst++ = *src++;
4636
4637 /* Zero bss. */
4638 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4639 *dst = 0;
4640 @end group
4641 @end smallexample
4642
4643 @node Forced Output Alignment
4644 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4645 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4646 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4647 @cindex output section alignment
4648 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4649 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4650 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4651
4652 @node Forced Input Alignment
4653 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4654 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4655 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4656 @cindex input section alignment
4657 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4658 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4659 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4660
4661 @node Output Section Constraint
4662 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4663 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4664 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4665 @cindex constraints on output sections
4666 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4667 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4668 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4669 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4670
4671 @node Output Section Region
4672 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4673 @kindex >@var{region}
4674 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4675 @cindex memory regions and sections
4676 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4677 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4678
4679 Here is a simple example:
4680 @smallexample
4681 @group
4682 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4683 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4684 @end group
4685 @end smallexample
4686
4687 @node Output Section Phdr
4688 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4689 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4690 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4691 @cindex program headers and sections
4692 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4693 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4694 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4695 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4696 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4697 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4698
4699 Here is a simple example:
4700 @smallexample
4701 @group
4702 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4703 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4704 @end group
4705 @end smallexample
4706
4707 @node Output Section Fill
4708 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4709 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4710 @cindex section fill pattern
4711 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4712 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4713 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4714 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4715 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4716 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4717 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4718 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4719 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4720 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4721 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4722 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4723 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4724
4725 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4726 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4727
4728 Here is a simple example:
4729 @smallexample
4730 @group
4731 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4732 @end group
4733 @end smallexample
4734
4735 @node Overlay Description
4736 @subsection Overlay Description
4737 @kindex OVERLAY
4738 @cindex overlays
4739 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4740 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4741 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4742 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4743 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4744 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4745 than another.
4746
4747 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4748 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4749 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4750 command is as follows:
4751 @smallexample
4752 @group
4753 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4754 @{
4755 @var{secname1}
4756 @{
4757 @var{output-section-command}
4758 @var{output-section-command}
4759 @dots{}
4760 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4761 @var{secname2}
4762 @{
4763 @var{output-section-command}
4764 @var{output-section-command}
4765 @dots{}
4766 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4767 @dots{}
4768 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4769 @end group
4770 @end smallexample
4771
4772 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4773 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4774 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4775 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4776 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4777 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4778
4779 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4780 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4781
4782 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4783 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4784 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4785 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4786 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4787 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4788
4789 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4790 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4791 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4792 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4793 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4794
4795 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4796 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4797 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4798 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4799 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4800 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4801 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4802
4803 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4804 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4805
4806 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4807 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4808 @smallexample
4809 @group
4810 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4811 @{
4812 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4813 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4814 @}
4815 @end group
4816 @end smallexample
4817 @noindent
4818 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4819 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4820 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4821 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4822 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4823 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4824
4825 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4826 like the following.
4827
4828 @smallexample
4829 @group
4830 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4831 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4832 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4833 @end group
4834 @end smallexample
4835
4836 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4837 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4838 example could have been written identically as follows.
4839
4840 @smallexample
4841 @group
4842 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4843 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4844 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4845 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4846 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4847 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4848 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4849 @end group
4850 @end smallexample
4851
4852 @node MEMORY
4853 @section MEMORY Command
4854 @kindex MEMORY
4855 @cindex memory regions
4856 @cindex regions of memory
4857 @cindex allocating memory
4858 @cindex discontinuous memory
4859 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4860 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4861
4862 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4863 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4864 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4865 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4866 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4867 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4868 around to fit into the available regions.
4869
4870 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4871 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4872 you wish. The syntax is:
4873 @smallexample
4874 @group
4875 MEMORY
4876 @{
4877 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4878 @dots{}
4879 @}
4880 @end group
4881 @end smallexample
4882
4883 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4884 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4885 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4886 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4887 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4888 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4889 command.
4890
4891 @cindex memory region attributes
4892 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4893 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4894 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4895 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4896 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4897 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4898 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4899
4900 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4901 @table @samp
4902 @item R
4903 Read-only section
4904 @item W
4905 Read/write section
4906 @item X
4907 Executable section
4908 @item A
4909 Allocatable section
4910 @item I
4911 Initialized section
4912 @item L
4913 Same as @samp{I}
4914 @item !
4915 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4916 @end table
4917
4918 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4919 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4920 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4921 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4922 attributes.
4923
4924 @kindex ORIGIN =
4925 @kindex o =
4926 @kindex org =
4927 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4928 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4929 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4930 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4931 @code{ORG}).
4932
4933 @kindex LENGTH =
4934 @kindex len =
4935 @kindex l =
4936 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4937 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4938 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4939 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4940
4941 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4942 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4943 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4944 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4945 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4946 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4947 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4948 region.
4949
4950 @smallexample
4951 @group
4952 MEMORY
4953 @{
4954 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4955 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4956 @}
4957 @end group
4958 @end smallexample
4959
4960 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4961 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4962 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4963 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4964 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4965 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4966 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4967 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4968 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4969
4970 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4971 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4972 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4973
4974 @smallexample
4975 @group
4976 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4977 @end group
4978 @end smallexample
4979
4980 @node PHDRS
4981 @section PHDRS Command
4982 @kindex PHDRS
4983 @cindex program headers
4984 @cindex ELF program headers
4985 @cindex program segments
4986 @cindex segments, ELF
4987 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4988 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4989 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4990 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4991
4992 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4993 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4994 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4995 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4996 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4997
4998 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4999 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5000 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5001 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5002 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5003
5004 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5005 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5006 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5007
5008 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5009 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5010
5011 @smallexample
5012 @group
5013 PHDRS
5014 @{
5015 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5016 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5017 @}
5018 @end group
5019 @end smallexample
5020
5021 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5022 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5023 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5024 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5025 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5026 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5027
5028 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5029 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5030 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5031 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5032 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5033 Section Phdr}.
5034
5035 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5036 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5037 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5038 contain the section.
5039
5040 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5041 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5042 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5043 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5044 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5045 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5046 segment at all.
5047
5048 @kindex FILEHDR
5049 @kindex PHDRS
5050 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5051 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5052 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5053 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5054 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5055 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5056 these keywords.
5057
5058 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5059 value of the keyword.
5060
5061 @table @asis
5062 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5063 Indicates an unused program header.
5064
5065 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5066 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5067 the file.
5068
5069 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5070 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5071
5072 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5073 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5074 found.
5075
5076 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5077 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5078
5079 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5080 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5081 ABI.
5082
5083 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5084 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5085
5086 @item @var{expression}
5087 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5088 be used for types not defined above.
5089 @end table
5090
5091 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5092 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5093 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5094 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5095 output section attribute.
5096
5097 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5098 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5099 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5100 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5101 header.
5102
5103 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5104 headers used on a native ELF system.
5105
5106 @example
5107 @group
5108 PHDRS
5109 @{
5110 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5111 interp PT_INTERP ;
5112 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5113 data PT_LOAD ;
5114 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5115 @}
5116
5117 SECTIONS
5118 @{
5119 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5120 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5121 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5122 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5123 @dots{}
5124 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5125 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5126 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5127 @dots{}
5128 @}
5129 @end group
5130 @end example
5131
5132 @node VERSION
5133 @section VERSION Command
5134 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5135 @cindex symbol versions
5136 @cindex version script
5137 @cindex versions of symbols
5138 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5139 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5140 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5141 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5142 shared library.
5143
5144 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5145 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5146 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5147
5148 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5149 @smallexample
5150 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5151 @end smallexample
5152
5153 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5154 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5155 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5156 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5157 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5158 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5159 library.
5160
5161 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5162 examples.
5163
5164 @smallexample
5165 VERS_1.1 @{
5166 global:
5167 foo1;
5168 local:
5169 old*;
5170 original*;
5171 new*;
5172 @};
5173
5174 VERS_1.2 @{
5175 foo2;
5176 @} VERS_1.1;
5177
5178 VERS_2.0 @{
5179 bar1; bar2;
5180 extern "C++" @{
5181 ns::*;
5182 "f(int, double)";
5183 @};
5184 @} VERS_1.2;
5185 @end smallexample
5186
5187 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5188 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5189 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5190 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5191 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5192 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5193 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5194 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5195 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5196 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5197
5198 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5199 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5200 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5201
5202 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5203 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5204 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5205
5206 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5207 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5208 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5209 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5210 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5211 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5212 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5213 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5214 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5215
5216 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5217 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5218 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5219 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5220
5221 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5222 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5223 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5224 won't.
5225
5226 @smallexample
5227 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5228 @end smallexample
5229
5230 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5231 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5232 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5233 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5234 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5235 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5236 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5237 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5238 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5239 search for each symbol reference.
5240
5241 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5242 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5243 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5244 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5245 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5246 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5247 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5248 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5249 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5250
5251 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5252 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5253 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5254 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5255 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5256 @smallexample
5257 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5258 @end smallexample
5259 @noindent
5260 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5261 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5262 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5263 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5264 takes precedence over a version script.
5265
5266 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5267 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5268 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5269 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5270 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5271
5272 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5273 source file. Here is an example:
5274
5275 @smallexample
5276 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5277 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5278 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5279 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5280 @end smallexample
5281
5282 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5283 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5284 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5285 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5286
5287 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5288 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5289 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5290 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5291 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5292 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5293
5294 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5295 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5296 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5297 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5298
5299 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5300
5301 @smallexample
5302 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5303 @end smallexample
5304
5305 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5306 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5307 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5308 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5309 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5310
5311 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5312 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5313 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5314 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5315 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5316 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5317 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5318 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5319 expect when you upgrade.
5320
5321 @node Expressions
5322 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5323 @cindex expressions
5324 @cindex arithmetic
5325 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5326 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5327 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5328 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5329
5330 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5331
5332 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5333 expressions.
5334
5335 @menu
5336 * Constants:: Constants
5337 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5338 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5339 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5340 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5341 * Operators:: Operators
5342 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5343 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5344 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5345 @end menu
5346
5347 @node Constants
5348 @subsection Constants
5349 @cindex integer notation
5350 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5351 All constants are integers.
5352
5353 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5354 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5355 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5356 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5357 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5358 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5359
5360 @cindex scaled integers
5361 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5362 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5363 @cindex suffixes for integers
5364 @cindex integer suffixes
5365 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5366 constant by
5367 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5368 @ifnottex
5369 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5370 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5371 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5372 @end ifnottex
5373 @tex
5374 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5375 @end tex
5376 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5377 respectively. For example, the following
5378 all refer to the same quantity:
5379
5380 @smallexample
5381 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5382 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5383 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5384 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5385 @end smallexample
5386
5387 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5388 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5389
5390 @node Symbolic Constants
5391 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5392 @cindex symbolic constants
5393 @kindex CONSTANT
5394 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5395 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5396
5397 @table @code
5398 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5399 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5400 The target's maximum page size.
5401
5402 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5403 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5404 The target's default page size.
5405 @end table
5406
5407 So for example:
5408
5409 @smallexample
5410 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5411 @end smallexample
5412
5413 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5414 supported by the target.
5415
5416 @node Symbols
5417 @subsection Symbol Names
5418 @cindex symbol names
5419 @cindex names
5420 @cindex quoted symbol names
5421 @kindex "
5422 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5423 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5424 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5425 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5426 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5427 @smallexample
5428 "SECTION" = 9;
5429 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5430 @end smallexample
5431
5432 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5433 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5434 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5435
5436 @node Orphan Sections
5437 @subsection Orphan Sections
5438 @cindex orphan
5439 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5440 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5441 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5442 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5443 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5444 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5445 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5446 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5447 at the end of the file.
5448
5449 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5450 well as section flag.
5451
5452 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5453 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5454 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5455 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5456 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5457 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5458 character.
5459
5460 @node Location Counter
5461 @subsection The Location Counter
5462 @kindex .
5463 @cindex dot
5464 @cindex location counter
5465 @cindex current output location
5466 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5467 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5468 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5469 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5470 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5471
5472 @cindex holes
5473 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5474 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5475 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5476 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5477 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5478
5479 @smallexample
5480 SECTIONS
5481 @{
5482 output :
5483 @{
5484 file1(.text)
5485 . = . + 1000;
5486 file2(.text)
5487 . += 1000;
5488 file3(.text)
5489 @} = 0x12345678;
5490 @}
5491 @end smallexample
5492 @noindent
5493 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5494 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5495 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5496 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5497 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5498 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5499
5500 @cindex dot inside sections
5501 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5502 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5503 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5504 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5505 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5506 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5507
5508 @smallexample
5509 SECTIONS
5510 @{
5511 . = 0x100
5512 .text: @{
5513 *(.text)
5514 . = 0x200
5515 @}
5516 . = 0x500
5517 .data: @{
5518 *(.data)
5519 . += 0x600
5520 @}
5521 @}
5522 @end smallexample
5523
5524 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5525 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5526 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5527 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5528 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5529 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5530 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5531 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5532
5533 @cindex dot outside sections
5534 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5535 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5536 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5537
5538 @smallexample
5539 SECTIONS
5540 @{
5541 start_of_text = . ;
5542 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5543 end_of_text = . ;
5544
5545 start_of_data = . ;
5546 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5547 end_of_data = . ;
5548 @}
5549 @end smallexample
5550
5551 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5552 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5553 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5554 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5555 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5556 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5557 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5558 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5559 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5560 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5561 as follows:
5562
5563 @smallexample
5564 SECTIONS
5565 @{
5566 start_of_text = . ;
5567 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5568 end_of_text = . ;
5569
5570 start_of_data = . ;
5571 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5572 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5573 end_of_data = . ;
5574 @}
5575 @end smallexample
5576
5577 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5578 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5579 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5580 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5581 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5582 section. So you could write:
5583
5584 @smallexample
5585 SECTIONS
5586 @{
5587 start_of_text = . ;
5588 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5589 end_of_text = . ;
5590
5591 . = . ;
5592 start_of_data = . ;
5593 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5594 end_of_data = . ;
5595 @}
5596 @end smallexample
5597
5598 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5599 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5600
5601 @need 2000
5602 @node Operators
5603 @subsection Operators
5604 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5605 @cindex arithmetic operators
5606 @cindex precedence in expressions
5607 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5608 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5609 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5610 @ifnottex
5611 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5612 @smallexample
5613 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5614 (highest)
5615 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5616 2 left * / %
5617 3 left + -
5618 4 left >> <<
5619 5 left == != > < <= >=
5620 6 left &
5621 7 left |
5622 8 left &&
5623 9 left ||
5624 10 right ? :
5625 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5626 (lowest)
5627 @end smallexample
5628 Notes:
5629 (1) Prefix operators
5630 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5631 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5632 @end ifnottex
5633 @tex
5634 \vskip \baselineskip
5635 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5636 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5637 \hrule
5638 \halign
5639 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5640 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5641 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5642 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5643 \noalign{\hrule}
5644 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5645 &highest&&&&&\cr
5646 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5647 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5648 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5649 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5650 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5651 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5652 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5653 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5654 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5655 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5656 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5657 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5658 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5659 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5660 \hrule}
5661 @end tex
5662 @iftex
5663 {
5664 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5665 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5666 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5667 }
5668 @end iftex
5669 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5670
5671 @node Evaluation
5672 @subsection Evaluation
5673 @cindex lazy evaluation
5674 @cindex expression evaluation order
5675 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5676 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5677
5678 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5679 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5680 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5681 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5682
5683 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5684 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5685 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5686 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5687
5688 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5689 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5690 allocation.
5691
5692 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5693 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5694
5695 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5696 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5697 following
5698 @smallexample
5699 @group
5700 SECTIONS
5701 @{
5702 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5703 @{ *(.text) @}
5704 @}
5705 @end group
5706 @end smallexample
5707 @noindent
5708 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5709 address}.
5710
5711 @node Expression Section
5712 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5713 @cindex expression sections
5714 @cindex absolute expressions
5715 @cindex relative expressions
5716 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5717 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5718 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5719 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5720 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5721 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5722 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5723 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5724 operations.
5725
5726 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5727 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5728 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5729 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5730 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5731 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5732 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5733 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5734 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5735 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5736 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5737 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5738 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5739 everywhere.
5740
5741 In the following simple example,
5742
5743 @smallexample
5744 @group
5745 SECTIONS
5746 @{
5747 . = 0x100;
5748 __executable_start = 0x100;
5749 .data :
5750 @{
5751 . = 0x10;
5752 __data_start = 0x10;
5753 *(.data)
5754 @}
5755 @dots{}
5756 @}
5757 @end group
5758 @end smallexample
5759
5760 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5761 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5762 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5763 section in the second two assignments.
5764
5765 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5766 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5767
5768 @itemize @bullet
5769 @item
5770 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5771 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5772 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5773 @item
5774 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5775 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5776 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5777 @item
5778 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5779 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5780 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5781 before applying the operator.
5782 @end itemize
5783
5784 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5785
5786 @itemize @bullet
5787 @item
5788 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5789 @item
5790 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5791 @item
5792 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5793 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5794 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5795 @item
5796 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5797 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5798 section as the relative operand(s).
5799 @item
5800 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5801 conversions) is an absolute address.
5802 @end itemize
5803
5804 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5805 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5806 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5807 section @samp{.data}:
5808 @smallexample
5809 SECTIONS
5810 @{
5811 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5812 @}
5813 @end smallexample
5814 @noindent
5815 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5816 @samp{.data} section.
5817
5818 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5819 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5820
5821 @node Builtin Functions
5822 @subsection Builtin Functions
5823 @cindex functions in expressions
5824 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5825 use in linker script expressions.
5826
5827 @table @code
5828 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5829 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5830 @cindex expression, absolute
5831 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5832 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5833 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5834 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5835
5836 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5837 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5838 @cindex section address in expression
5839 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5840 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5841 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5842 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5843 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5844 the other two will be absolute:
5845 @smallexample
5846 @group
5847 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5848 .output1 :
5849 @{
5850 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5851 @dots{}
5852 @}
5853 .output :
5854 @{
5855 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5856 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5857 @}
5858 @dots{} @}
5859 @end group
5860 @end smallexample
5861
5862 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5863 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5864 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5865 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5866 @cindex round up location counter
5867 @cindex align location counter
5868 @cindex round up expression
5869 @cindex align expression
5870 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5871 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5872 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5873 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5874 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5875 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5876
5877 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5878 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5879 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5880 input sections:
5881 @smallexample
5882 @group
5883 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5884 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5885 *(.data)
5886 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5887 @}
5888 @dots{} @}
5889 @end group
5890 @end smallexample
5891 @noindent
5892 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5893 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5894 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5895 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5896
5897 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5898
5899 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5900 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5901 @cindex section alignment
5902 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5903 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5904 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5905 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5906 value in that section.
5907 @smallexample
5908 @group
5909 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5910 .output @{
5911 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5912 @dots{}
5913 @}
5914 @dots{} @}
5915 @end group
5916 @end smallexample
5917
5918 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5919 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5920 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5921 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5922 section.
5923
5924 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5925 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5926 This is equivalent to either
5927 @smallexample
5928 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5929 @end smallexample
5930 or
5931 @smallexample
5932 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5933 @end smallexample
5934 @noindent
5935 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5936 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5937 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5938 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5939 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5940 bytes in the on-disk file.
5941
5942 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5943 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5944 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5945 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5946 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5947
5948 @noindent
5949 Example:
5950 @smallexample
5951 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5952 @end smallexample
5953
5954 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5955 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5956 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5957 evaluation purposes.
5958
5959 @smallexample
5960 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5961 @end smallexample
5962
5963 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5964 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5965 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5966 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
5967 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5968 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5969 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5970 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5971 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5972 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5973 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5974 section alignment.
5975
5976 @smallexample
5977 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5978 @end smallexample
5979
5980 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5981 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5982 @cindex symbol defaults
5983 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5984 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5985 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5986 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5987 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5988 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5989 existed, its value is preserved:
5990
5991 @smallexample
5992 @group
5993 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5994 .text : @{
5995 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5996 @dots{}
5997 @}
5998 @dots{}
5999 @}
6000 @end group
6001 @end smallexample
6002
6003 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6004 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6005 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6006
6007 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6008 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6009 @cindex section load address in expression
6010 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6011 Section LMA}).
6012
6013 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6014 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6015 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6016 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6017
6018 @kindex MAX
6019 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6020 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6021
6022 @kindex MIN
6023 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6024 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6025
6026 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6027 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6028 @cindex unallocated address, next
6029 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6030 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6031 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6032 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6033
6034 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6035 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6036 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6037
6038 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6039 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6040 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6041 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6042 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6043 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6044 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6045 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6046 name.
6047
6048 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6049 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6050 @cindex section size
6051 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6052 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6053 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6054 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6055 @smallexample
6056 @group
6057 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6058 .output @{
6059 .start = . ;
6060 @dots{}
6061 .end = . ;
6062 @}
6063 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6064 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6065 @dots{} @}
6066 @end group
6067 @end smallexample
6068
6069 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6070 @itemx sizeof_headers
6071 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6072 @cindex header size
6073 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6074 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6075 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6076 choose, to facilitate paging.
6077
6078 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6079 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6080 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6081 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6082 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6083 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6084 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6085 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6086 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6087 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6088 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6089 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6090 @end table
6091
6092 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6093 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6094 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6095 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6096 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6097 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6098 linker will report an error.
6099
6100 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6101
6102 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6103 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6104 commands.
6105
6106 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6107 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6108 read. This can affect archive searching.
6109
6110 @ifset GENERIC
6111 @node Machine Dependent
6112 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6113
6114 @cindex machine dependencies
6115 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6116 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6117 functionality are not listed.
6118
6119 @menu
6120 @ifset H8300
6121 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6122 @end ifset
6123 @ifset I960
6124 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6125 @end ifset
6126 @ifset M68HC11
6127 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6128 @end ifset
6129 @ifset ARM
6130 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6131 @end ifset
6132 @ifset HPPA
6133 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6134 @end ifset
6135 @ifset M68K
6136 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6137 @end ifset
6138 @ifset MIPS
6139 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6140 @end ifset
6141 @ifset MMIX
6142 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6143 @end ifset
6144 @ifset MSP430
6145 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6146 @end ifset
6147 @ifset NDS32
6148 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6149 @end ifset
6150 @ifset NIOSII
6151 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6152 @end ifset
6153 @ifset POWERPC
6154 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6155 @end ifset
6156 @ifset POWERPC64
6157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6158 @end ifset
6159 @ifset SPU
6160 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6161 @end ifset
6162 @ifset TICOFF
6163 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6164 @end ifset
6165 @ifset WIN32
6166 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6167 @end ifset
6168 @ifset XTENSA
6169 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6170 @end ifset
6171 @end menu
6172 @end ifset
6173
6174 @ifset H8300
6175 @ifclear GENERIC
6176 @raisesections
6177 @end ifclear
6178
6179 @node H8/300
6180 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6181
6182 @cindex H8/300 support
6183 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6184 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6185
6186 @table @emph
6187 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6188 @item relaxing address modes
6189 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6190 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6191 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6192 respectively.
6193
6194 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6195 @item synthesizing instructions
6196 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6197 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6198 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6199 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6200 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6201 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6202 top page of memory).
6203
6204 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6205 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6206 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6207 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6208 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6209 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6210 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6211
6212 @item bit manipulation instructions
6213 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6214 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6215 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6216 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6217 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6218 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6219 the top page of memory).
6220
6221 @item system control instructions
6222 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6223 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6224 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6225 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6226 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6227 the top page of memory).
6228 @end table
6229
6230 @ifclear GENERIC
6231 @lowersections
6232 @end ifclear
6233 @end ifset
6234
6235 @ifclear GENERIC
6236 @ifset Renesas
6237 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6238 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6239 @node Renesas
6240 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6241
6242 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6243 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6244 options are required for these chips.
6245 @end ifset
6246 @end ifclear
6247
6248 @ifset I960
6249 @ifclear GENERIC
6250 @raisesections
6251 @end ifclear
6252
6253 @node i960
6254 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6255
6256 @cindex i960 support
6257
6258 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6259 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6260 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6261 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6262 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6263 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6264 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6265
6266 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6267 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6268 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6269 the names
6270
6271 @smallexample
6272 @group
6273 try
6274 libtry.a
6275 tryca
6276 libtryca.a
6277 @end group
6278 @end smallexample
6279
6280 @noindent
6281 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6282 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6283
6284 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6285 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6286 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6287 specifies a library.
6288
6289 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6290 @cindex relaxing on i960
6291 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6292 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6293 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6294 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6295 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6296 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6297 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6298 not itself call any subroutines).
6299
6300 @ifclear GENERIC
6301 @lowersections
6302 @end ifclear
6303 @end ifset
6304
6305 @ifset ARM
6306 @ifclear GENERIC
6307 @raisesections
6308 @end ifclear
6309
6310 @ifset M68HC11
6311 @ifclear GENERIC
6312 @raisesections
6313 @end ifclear
6314
6315 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6316 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6317
6318 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6319
6320 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6321
6322 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6323 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6324
6325 @table @emph
6326 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6327 @item relaxing address modes
6328 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6329 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6330 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6331 respectively.
6332
6333 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6334 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6335 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6336
6337 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6338 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6339 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6340 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6341 @code{bset} instructions.
6342
6343 @end table
6344
6345 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6346
6347 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6348 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6349 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6350 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6351 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6352 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6353 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6354 point to the function trampoline.
6355
6356 @ifclear GENERIC
6357 @lowersections
6358 @end ifclear
6359 @end ifset
6360
6361 @node ARM
6362 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6363
6364 @cindex ARM interworking support
6365 @kindex --support-old-code
6366 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6367 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6368 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6369 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6370 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6371 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6372 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6373 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6374 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6375 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6376
6377 @cindex thumb entry point
6378 @cindex entry point, thumb
6379 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6380 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6381 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6382 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6383 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6384 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6385
6386 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6387 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6388 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6389 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6390 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6391 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6392
6393 @cindex BE8
6394 @kindex --be8
6395 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6396 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6397 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6398
6399 @cindex TARGET1
6400 @kindex --target1-rel
6401 @kindex --target1-abs
6402 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6403 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6404 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6405 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6406
6407 @cindex TARGET2
6408 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6409 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6410 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6411 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6412 @table @samp
6413 @item rel
6414 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6415 @item abs
6416 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6417 @item got-rel
6418 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6419 @end table
6420
6421 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6422 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6423 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6424 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6425 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6426 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6427
6428 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6429 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6430 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6431
6432 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6433 relocations are ignored.
6434
6435 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6436 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6437 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6438 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6439
6440 @smallexample
6441 TST rM, #1
6442 MOVEQ PC, rM
6443 BX Rn
6444 @end smallexample
6445
6446 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6447 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6448 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6449
6450 @cindex USE_BLX
6451 @kindex --use-blx
6452 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6453 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6454 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6455 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6456 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6457
6458 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6459 specify it if you are using that target.
6460
6461 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6462 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6463 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6464 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6465 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6466 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6467 the support code can read the intended values.
6468
6469 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6470 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6471 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6472 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6473 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6474 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6475
6476 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6477 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6478 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6479 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6480 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6481 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6482
6483 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6484 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6485 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6486 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6487 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6488 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6489 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6490
6491 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6492 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6493 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6494 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6495 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6496 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6497 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6498
6499 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6500 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6501 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6502
6503 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6504 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6505 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6506 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6507 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6508 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6509 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6510 not be diagnosed.
6511
6512 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6513 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6514 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6515 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6516 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6517 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6518 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6519
6520 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6521 @kindex --pic-veneer
6522 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6523 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6524 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6525 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6526
6527 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6528 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6529 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6530 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6531 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6532 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6533 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6534 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6535 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6536 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6537 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6538 where they should be placed.
6539
6540 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6541 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6542 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6543 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6544 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6545 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6546 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6547 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6548 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6549 from the input sections.
6550
6551 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6552 @samp{N = +1}.
6553
6554 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6555 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6556 otherwise.
6557
6558 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6559 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6560 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6561 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6562
6563 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6564
6565 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6566 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6567 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6568 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6569
6570 @kindex --long-plt
6571 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6572 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6573 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6574 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6575
6576 @ifclear GENERIC
6577 @lowersections
6578 @end ifclear
6579 @end ifset
6580
6581 @ifset HPPA
6582 @ifclear GENERIC
6583 @raisesections
6584 @end ifclear
6585
6586 @node HPPA ELF32
6587 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6588 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6589 @kindex --multi-subspace
6590 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6591 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6592 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6593 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6594 multiple sub-spaces.
6595
6596 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6597 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6598 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6599 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6600 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6601 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6602 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6603 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6604 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6605 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6606 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6607 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6608 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6609 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6610 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6611 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6612
6613 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6614 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6615 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6616 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6617
6618 @ifclear GENERIC
6619 @lowersections
6620 @end ifclear
6621 @end ifset
6622
6623 @ifset M68K
6624 @ifclear GENERIC
6625 @raisesections
6626 @end ifclear
6627
6628 @node M68K
6629 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6630
6631 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6632 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6633 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6634 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6635 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6636 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6637 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6638 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6639 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6640 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6641 support such GOTs.
6642 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6643 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6644 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6645 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6646
6647 @ifclear GENERIC
6648 @lowersections
6649 @end ifclear
6650 @end ifset
6651
6652 @ifset MIPS
6653 @ifclear GENERIC
6654 @raisesections
6655 @end ifclear
6656
6657 @node MIPS
6658 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6659
6660 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6661 @kindex --insn32
6662 @kindex --no-insn32
6663 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6664 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6665 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6666 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6667 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6668 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6669
6670 @ifclear GENERIC
6671 @lowersections
6672 @end ifclear
6673 @end ifset
6674
6675 @ifset MMIX
6676 @ifclear GENERIC
6677 @raisesections
6678 @end ifclear
6679
6680 @node MMIX
6681 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6682 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6683 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6684 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6685 can translate between the two formats.
6686
6687 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6688 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6689 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6690 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6691 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6692 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6693 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6694 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6695
6696 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6697 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6698 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6699 of a section.
6700
6701 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6702 are left out from an mmo file.
6703
6704 @ifclear GENERIC
6705 @lowersections
6706 @end ifclear
6707 @end ifset
6708
6709 @ifset MSP430
6710 @ifclear GENERIC
6711 @raisesections
6712 @end ifclear
6713
6714 @node MSP430
6715 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6716 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6717 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6718 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6719
6720 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6721 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6722
6723 @table @code
6724 @item @samp{.vectors}
6725 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6726
6727 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6728 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6729 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6730
6731 @item @samp{.infomem}
6732 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6733 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6734
6735 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6736 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6737 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6738
6739 @item @samp{.noinit}
6740 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6741
6742 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6743 @end table
6744
6745 @ifclear GENERIC
6746 @lowersections
6747 @end ifclear
6748 @end ifset
6749
6750 @ifset NDS32
6751 @ifclear GENERIC
6752 @raisesections
6753 @end ifclear
6754
6755 @node NDS32
6756 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6757 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6758 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6759 relaxes objects according to these options.
6760
6761 @table @code
6762 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6763 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6764
6765 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6766 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6767
6768 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6769 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6770
6771 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6772 Export the EX9 table after linking.
6773
6774 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6775 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6776
6777 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6778 Update the existing EX9 table.
6779
6780 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6781 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6782
6783 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6784 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6785
6786 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6787 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6788
6789 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6790 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6791 @end table
6792
6793 @ifclear GENERIC
6794 @lowersections
6795 @end ifclear
6796 @end ifset
6797
6798 @ifset NIOSII
6799 @ifclear GENERIC
6800 @raisesections
6801 @end ifclear
6802
6803 @node Nios II
6804 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6805 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
6806 @kindex --relax on Nios II
6807
6808 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6809 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6810 which may result in @command{ld} giving
6811 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6812 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6813 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6814 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6815 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6816 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6817 larger than 256MB.
6818
6819 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6820 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6821 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6822 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6823 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6824 register as a temporary.
6825
6826 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6827 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6828 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6829
6830 @ifclear GENERIC
6831 @lowersections
6832 @end ifclear
6833 @end ifset
6834
6835 @ifset POWERPC
6836 @ifclear GENERIC
6837 @raisesections
6838 @end ifclear
6839
6840 @node PowerPC ELF32
6841 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6842 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6843 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6844 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6845 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6846 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6847 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6848 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6849 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6850 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6851 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6852 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6853 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6854
6855 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6856 @table @option
6857 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6858 @kindex --bss-plt
6859 @item --bss-plt
6860 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6861 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6862 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6863 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6864 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6865 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6866 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6867 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6868
6869 @kindex --secure-plt
6870 @item --secure-plt
6871 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6872 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6873 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6874 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6875 style BSS PLT.
6876
6877 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6878 @kindex --sdata-got
6879 @item --sdata-got
6880 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6881 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6882 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6883 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6884 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6885 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6886 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6887 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6888 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6889 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6890 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6891 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6892
6893 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6894 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6895 @item --emit-stub-syms
6896 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6897 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6898
6899 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6900 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6901 @item --no-tls-optimize
6902 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6903 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6904 disable the optimization.
6905 @end table
6906
6907 @ifclear GENERIC
6908 @lowersections
6909 @end ifclear
6910 @end ifset
6911
6912 @ifset POWERPC64
6913 @ifclear GENERIC
6914 @raisesections
6915 @end ifclear
6916
6917 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6918 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6919
6920 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6921 @table @option
6922 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6923 @kindex --stub-group-size
6924 @item --stub-group-size
6925 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6926 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6927 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6928 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6929 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6930 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6931 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6932 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6933 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6934 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6935 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6936 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6937 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6938 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6939
6940 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6941 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6942 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6943 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6944
6945 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6946 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6947 @item --emit-stub-syms
6948 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6949 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6950
6951 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6952 @kindex --dotsyms
6953 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6954 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6955 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6956 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6957 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6958 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6959 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6960 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6961 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6962 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6963 feature.
6964
6965 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6966 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6967 @item --no-tls-optimize
6968 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6969 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6970 disable the optimization.
6971
6972 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6973 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6974 @item --no-opd-optimize
6975 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6976 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6977 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6978 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6979
6980 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6981 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6982 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6983 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6984 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6985 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6986 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6987
6988 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6989 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6990 @item --no-toc-optimize
6991 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6992 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6993 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6994 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6995 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6996 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6997 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6998 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6999 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7000 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7001 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7002 optimization.
7003
7004 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7005 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7006 @item --no-multi-toc
7007 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7008 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7009 where TOC
7010 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7011 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7012 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7013 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7014 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7015 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7016 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7017 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7018
7019 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7020 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7021 @item --no-toc-sort
7022 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7023 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7024 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7025 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7026 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7027 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7028 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7029 off this feature.
7030
7031 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7032 @kindex --plt-align
7033 @kindex --no-plt-align
7034 @item --plt-align
7035 @itemx --no-plt-align
7036 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7037 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7038 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
7039 are packed tightly.
7040
7041 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7042 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7043 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7044 @item --plt-static-chain
7045 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7046 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7047 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7048 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7049
7050 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7051 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7052 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7053 @item --plt-thread-safe
7054 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7055 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7056 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7057 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7058 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7059 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7060 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7061 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7062 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7063 default behaviour.
7064 @end table
7065
7066 @ifclear GENERIC
7067 @lowersections
7068 @end ifclear
7069 @end ifset
7070
7071 @ifset SPU
7072 @ifclear GENERIC
7073 @raisesections
7074 @end ifclear
7075
7076 @node SPU ELF
7077 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7078
7079 @cindex SPU ELF options
7080 @table @option
7081
7082 @cindex SPU plugins
7083 @kindex --plugin
7084 @item --plugin
7085 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7086
7087 @cindex SPU overlays
7088 @kindex --no-overlays
7089 @item --no-overlays
7090 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7091 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7092 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7093 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7094
7095 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7096 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7097 @item --emit-stub-syms
7098 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7099 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7100
7101 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7102 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7103 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7104 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7105 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7106 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7107
7108 @cindex SPU local store size
7109 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7110 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7111 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7112 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7113 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7114
7115 @cindex SPU
7116 @kindex --stack-analysis
7117 @item --stack-analysis
7118 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7119 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7120 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7121 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7122 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7123 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7124 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7125 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7126 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7127 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7128 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7129 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7130 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7131 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7132 and calls will be given.
7133
7134 @cindex SPU
7135 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7136 @item --emit-stack-syms
7137 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7138 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7139 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7140 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7141 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7142 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7143 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7144 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7145 @end table
7146
7147 @ifclear GENERIC
7148 @lowersections
7149 @end ifclear
7150 @end ifset
7151
7152 @ifset TICOFF
7153 @ifclear GENERIC
7154 @raisesections
7155 @end ifclear
7156
7157 @node TI COFF
7158 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7159 @cindex TI COFF versions
7160 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7161 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7162 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7163 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7164 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7165 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7166
7167 @ifclear GENERIC
7168 @lowersections
7169 @end ifclear
7170 @end ifset
7171
7172 @ifset WIN32
7173 @ifclear GENERIC
7174 @raisesections
7175 @end ifclear
7176
7177 @node WIN32
7178 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7179
7180 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7181 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7182 command line options mentioned here.
7183
7184 @table @emph
7185 @cindex import libraries
7186 @item import libraries
7187 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7188 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7189 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7190 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7191 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7192 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7193
7194 @item exporting DLL symbols
7195 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7196 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7197
7198 @table @emph
7199 @item using auto-export functionality
7200 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7201 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7202 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7203
7204 @itemize
7205 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7206 @item --exclude-symbols
7207 @item --exclude-libs
7208 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7209 @item --version-script
7210 @end itemize
7211
7212 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7213 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7214 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7215 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7216 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7217 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7218 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7219 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7220
7221 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7222 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7223 if either of the following are true:
7224
7225 @itemize
7226 @item A DEF file is used.
7227 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7228 @end itemize
7229
7230 @item using a DEF file
7231 @cindex using a DEF file
7232 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7233 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7234 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7235 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7236 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7237
7238 @example
7239 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7240 @end example
7241
7242 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7243 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7244
7245 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7246
7247 @example
7248 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7249
7250 EXPORTS
7251 foo
7252 bar
7253 _bar = bar
7254 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7255 var1 DATA
7256 doo = foo == foo2
7257 eoo DATA == var1
7258 @end example
7259
7260 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7261 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7262 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7263 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7264 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7265 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7266 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7267 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7268 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7269
7270 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7271 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7272 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7273
7274 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7275 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7276 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7277 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7278
7279 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7280 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7281 non-default base address for the image.
7282
7283 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7284 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7285 filename specified on the command line.
7286
7287 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7288
7289 @example
7290 EXPORTS
7291 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7292 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7293 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7294 @end example
7295
7296 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7297 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7298 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7299 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7300 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7301 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7302 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7303
7304 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7305
7306 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7307 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7308 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7309 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7310 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7311
7312 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7313 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7314 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7315 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7316
7317 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7318 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7319 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7320 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7321 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7322 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7323 application will behave unexpectedly.
7324
7325 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7326 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7327 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7328 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7329 the DLL without an import library.
7330
7331 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7332 other DEF file statements
7333
7334 @cindex creating a DEF file
7335 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7336 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7337
7338 @item Using decorations
7339 @cindex Using decorations
7340 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7341 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7342 declared as:
7343
7344 @example
7345 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7346 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7347 @end example
7348
7349 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7350 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7351 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7352 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7353
7354 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7355 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7356 instead:
7357
7358 @example
7359 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7360 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7361 @end example
7362
7363 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7364 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7365 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7366 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7367 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7368 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7369 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7370 information.
7371 @end table
7372
7373 @cindex automatic data imports
7374 @item automatic data imports
7375 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7376 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7377 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7378 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7379 code to these platforms, especially for large
7380 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7381 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7382 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7383 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7384 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7385 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7386 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7387 trigger the feature's use.
7388
7389 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7390 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7391
7392 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7393 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7394
7395 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7396 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7397 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7398 below.
7399
7400 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7401 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7402 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7403 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7404 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7405 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7406 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7407 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7408 references.
7409
7410 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7411 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7412 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7413 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7414 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7415 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7416 run without error on an older system.
7417
7418 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7419 enabled as needed.
7420
7421 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7422 @item direct linking to a dll
7423 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7424 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7425 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7426 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7427 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7428 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7429 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7430 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7431 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7432 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7433
7434 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7435 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7436 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7437 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7438 select the dll instead of an import library.
7439
7440
7441 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7442 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7443
7444 @example
7445 libxxx.dll.a
7446 xxx.dll.a
7447 libxxx.a
7448 xxx.lib
7449 cygxxx.dll (*)
7450 libxxx.dll
7451 xxx.dll
7452 @end example
7453
7454 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7455
7456 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7457 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7458 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7459 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7460 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7461
7462 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7463 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7464 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7465 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7466 could coexist on the same machine.
7467
7468 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7469 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7470 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7471
7472 @example
7473 bin/
7474 cygxxx.dll
7475 lib/
7476 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7477 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7478 @end example
7479
7480 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7481 done two ways:
7482
7483 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7484 @example
7485 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7486 @end example
7487
7488 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7489 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7490 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7491 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7492
7493 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7494 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7495 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7496 making the app/dll.
7497
7498 @example
7499 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7500 @end example
7501
7502 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7503
7504 @example
7505 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7506 @end example
7507
7508 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7509 perfectly legal
7510
7511 @example
7512 bin/
7513 cygxxx-5.dll
7514 lib/
7515 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7516 @end example
7517
7518 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7519 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7520 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7521
7522 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7523 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7524
7525 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7526 work with auto-imported data.
7527
7528 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7529 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7530 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7531 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7532 possible to do this without an import lib.
7533
7534 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7535 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7536 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7537 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7538
7539 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7540 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7541 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7542 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7543 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7544 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7545 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7546
7547 @item symbol aliasing
7548 @table @emph
7549 @item adding additional names
7550 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7551 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7552 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7553 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7554 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7555
7556 @example
7557 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7558
7559 EXPORTS
7560 foo
7561 _foo = foo
7562 @end example
7563
7564 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7565
7566 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7567 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7568
7569 @example
7570 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7571 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7572 @end example
7573
7574 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7575 symbols.
7576
7577 @item renaming symbols
7578 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7579 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7580 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7581 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7582 created). In the following example:
7583
7584 @example
7585 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7586
7587 EXPORTS
7588 _foo = foo
7589 @end example
7590
7591 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7592 @samp{_foo}.
7593 @end table
7594
7595 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7596 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7597 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7598 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7599 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7600 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7601 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7602 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7603 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7604 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7605 which is probably not what you wanted.
7606
7607 @cindex weak externals
7608 @item weak externals
7609 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7610 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7611 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7612 are three variants of weak externals:
7613 @itemize
7614 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7615 called lazy externals.
7616 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7617 This form is not presently implemented.
7618 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7619 implemented.
7620 @end itemize
7621 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7622 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7623 uses a default value.
7624
7625 @cindex aligned common symbols
7626 @item aligned common symbols
7627 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7628 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7629 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7630 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7631 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7632 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7633 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7634 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7635
7636 @end table
7637
7638 @ifclear GENERIC
7639 @lowersections
7640 @end ifclear
7641 @end ifset
7642
7643 @ifset XTENSA
7644 @ifclear GENERIC
7645 @raisesections
7646 @end ifclear
7647
7648 @node Xtensa
7649 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7650
7651 @cindex Xtensa processors
7652 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7653 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7654 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7655 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7656 example, with the command:
7657
7658 @smallexample
7659 SECTIONS
7660 @{
7661 .text : @{
7662 *(.literal .text)
7663 @}
7664 @}
7665 @end smallexample
7666
7667 @noindent
7668 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7669 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7670 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7671 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7672 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7673 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7674 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7675
7676 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7677 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7678 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7679 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7680 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7681 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7682 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7683 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7684 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7685 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7686 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7687 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7688
7689 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7690 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7691 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7692 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7693 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7694 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7695 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7696 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7697 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7698 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7699 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7700 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7701 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7702 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7703
7704 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7705 control the linker:
7706
7707 @cindex Xtensa options
7708 @table @option
7709 @item --size-opt
7710 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7711 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7712 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7713 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7714 preserve the correctness of the code.
7715 @end table
7716
7717 @ifclear GENERIC
7718 @lowersections
7719 @end ifclear
7720 @end ifset
7721
7722 @ifclear SingleFormat
7723 @node BFD
7724 @chapter BFD
7725
7726 @cindex back end
7727 @cindex object file management
7728 @cindex object formats available
7729 @kindex objdump -i
7730 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7731 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7732 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7733 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7734 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7735 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7736 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7737 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7738 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7739
7740 @cindex BFD requirements
7741 @cindex requirements for BFD
7742 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7743 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7744 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7745 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7746 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7747 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7748 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7749
7750 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7751 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7752 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7753 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7754
7755 @menu
7756 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7757 @end menu
7758
7759 @node BFD outline
7760 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7761 @cindex opening object files
7762 @include bfdsumm.texi
7763 @end ifclear
7764
7765 @node Reporting Bugs
7766 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7767 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7768 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7769
7770 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7771
7772 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7773 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7774 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7775 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7776 @command{ld}.
7777
7778 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7779 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7780
7781 @menu
7782 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7783 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7784 @end menu
7785
7786 @node Bug Criteria
7787 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7788 @cindex bug criteria
7789
7790 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7791
7792 @itemize @bullet
7793 @cindex fatal signal
7794 @cindex linker crash
7795 @cindex crash of linker
7796 @item
7797 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7798 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7799
7800 @cindex error on valid input
7801 @item
7802 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7803
7804 @cindex invalid input
7805 @item
7806 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7807 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7808 object files are correct.
7809
7810 @item
7811 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7812 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7813 @end itemize
7814
7815 @node Bug Reporting
7816 @section How to Report Bugs
7817 @cindex bug reports
7818 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7819
7820 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7821 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7822 recommend you contact that organization first.
7823
7824 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7825 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7826 distribution.
7827
7828 @ifset BUGURL
7829 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7830 @value{BUGURL}.
7831 @end ifset
7832
7833 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7834 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7835 fact or leave it out, state it!
7836
7837 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7838 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7839 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7840 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7841 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7842 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7843 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7844 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7845 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7846 and the most helpful.
7847
7848 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7849 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7850 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7851
7852 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7853 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7854 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7855 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7856
7857 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7858
7859 @itemize @bullet
7860 @item
7861 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7862 the @samp{--version} argument.
7863
7864 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7865 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7866
7867 @item
7868 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7869 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7870
7871 @item
7872 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7873 version number.
7874
7875 @item
7876 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7877 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7878
7879 @item
7880 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7881 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7882 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7883 sufficient.
7884
7885 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7886 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7887
7888 @item
7889 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7890 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7891 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7892 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7893 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7894 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7895 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7896 attachments are best.
7897
7898 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7899 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7900 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7901 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7902 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7903
7904 @item
7905 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7906 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7907
7908 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7909 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7910 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7911 a chance to make a mistake.
7912
7913 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7914 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7915 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7916 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7917 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7918 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7919 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7920 any conclusion from our observations.
7921
7922 @item
7923 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7924 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7925 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7926 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7927 context, not by line number.
7928
7929 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7930 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7931 @end itemize
7932
7933 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7934
7935 @itemize @bullet
7936 @item
7937 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7938
7939 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7940 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7941 changes will not affect it.
7942
7943 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7944 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7945 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7946 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7947
7948 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7949 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7950 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7951 less time, and so on.
7952
7953 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7954 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7955
7956 @item
7957 A patch for the bug.
7958
7959 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7960 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7961 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7962 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7963
7964 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7965 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7966 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7967 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7968 fixed.
7969
7970 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7971 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7972 help us to understand.
7973
7974 @item
7975 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7976
7977 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7978 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7979 @end itemize
7980
7981 @node MRI
7982 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7983 @cindex MRI compatibility
7984 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7985 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7986 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7987 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7988 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7989 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7990 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7991
7992 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7993 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7994 features to make use of them.
7995
7996 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7997 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7998
7999 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8000 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8001 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8002 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8003 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8004
8005 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8006
8007 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8008 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8009 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8010
8011 @table @code
8012 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8013 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8014 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8015 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8016 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8017 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8018 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8019 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8020 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8021 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8022 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8023
8024 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8025 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8026 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8027 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8028
8029 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8030
8031 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8032 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8033 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8034 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8035
8036 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8037 @item BASE @var{expression}
8038 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8039 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8040
8041 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8042 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8043 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8044 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8045
8046 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8047 @item END
8048 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8049
8050 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8051 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8052 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8053 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8054
8055 @enumerate
8056 @item
8057 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8058
8059 @item
8060 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8061
8062 @item
8063 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8064 @samp{COFF}
8065 @end enumerate
8066
8067 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8068 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8069 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8070 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8071
8072 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8073 same line, with no change in its effect.
8074
8075 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8076 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8077 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8078 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8079 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8080 command line.
8081
8082 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8083 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8084 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8085 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8086 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8087
8088 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8089 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8090 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8091 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8092 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8093 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8094 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8095 file, in the order specified.
8096
8097 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8098 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8099 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8100 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8101 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8102 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8103
8104 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8105 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8106 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8107 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8108 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8109 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8110 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8111 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8112 @end table
8113
8114 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8115 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8116 @include fdl.texi
8117
8118 @node LD Index
8119 @unnumbered LD Index
8120
8121 @printindex cp
8122
8123 @tex
8124 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8125 % meantime:
8126 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8127 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8128 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8129 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8130 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8131 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8132 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8133 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8134 \page\colophon
8135 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8136 @end tex
8137
8138 @bye
This page took 0.184156 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.